Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 386

Content

Instruction Manual

SF6 circuit--breaker
GL318
With spring operating mechanisms
FK3--4

This equipment contains Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas (SF6) covered by the Kyoto Protocol, which has
a Global Warming Potential (GWP) of 22200.
SF6 should be recovered and not released into the atmosphere.
For further information on the use and handling of SF6, please refer to IEC 62271: High-Voltage
Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 303: Use and Handling of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6).

Administrator First issue Compiled by Approved by


AHT 19--05--2008 J. Bossu O. Grejon

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 1/8
Content
Instruction Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 2/8
Content
Instruction Manual

Safety

Product safety sheets Annexes

Technical data

Technical characteristics L10--044EN/01

Description and operation

General description of the circuit--breaker L12--055EN/01

Description of the interrupting chambers L12--105EN/02

Pole operation (interrupting principle) L13--005EN/02

Operating device L14--005EN/03

SF6 gas mixture monitoring L20--001EN/06

Packaging - Shipping and storage

Packaging -- Identification -- Storage L22--007EN/03

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 3/8
Content
Instruction Manual

Installation

Erection general instructions L30--002EN/01

Tightening torques L31--001EN/01

Erection general procedures L31--003EN/01

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts L31--074EN/01

3,000 daN)
The installation procedure (advised), developed (minimum)
below, imposes a lifting equipment with the following
characteristics :
NOTE : If it is impossible to obtain the advoca- H+2m
ted lifting equipment, one “complementary instal-
lation procedure” is supplied in annexes.
H
H+1m

Support--frame assembly L31--137EN/02

Column -- chambers coupling L31--715EN/01

Tipping down the pole of the circuit--breaker L31--721EN/02


and vacuum operation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact L31--734EN/01


surfaces

Installing the capacitors L31--741EN/03

Installing stress--shields on the interrupting L31--750EN/04


chambers

Lifting and positionning the pole L31--766EN/04

Installing terminals with preparation of L31--770EN/02


contact surfaces

Continued on next page.

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 4/8
Content
Instruction Manual

Installation, continued

Installing the operating device L31--7801EN/01

Fitting the filler unit and its pipe work. L31--982EN/01

Connection the vacuum pump L31--858EN/01

Installing the synchronous device RPH2 L31--871EN/01

RPH2 -- Correspondence between C.B. poles and L31--872EN/01


the network phases and the phase measuring the
reference voltage

Vacuum operation L31--886EN/01

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure for using L31--901EN/03


the pressure gauge (tool)

Pre--filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa L31--956EN/01

Filling with SF6 gas L32--017EN/01

Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections L34--011EN/02

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 5/8
Content
Instruction Manual

Maintenance

Maintenance plan L51--004EN/04

Electrical wear limits L51--052EN/03

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection L51--113EN/01

Intervention on the operating device L51--303EN/03

Annexes

Tooling and accessories L60--025EN/01

Product safety sheets PS0000/A

Acceptance criteria CA 103 181/3/002

RPH2 -- Outline drawing 58.001.115--01

RPH2 -- Wiring diagram (2SA0) 58.010.111--16E

RPH2 -- Service manual 58.020.034 E

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 6/8
Content
Instruction Manual

Complementary installation procedure

The complementary installation procedure, devel- 3,000 daN)


oped below, imposes a lifting equipment with the fol- (minimum)
lowing characteristics :
H+2m

+ H

Support--frame assembly L31--138EN/02

Lifting and positionning the pole L31--200EN/04

Installing terminals with preparation of contact L31--505EN/01


surfaces

Installing the capacitors L31--600EN/03

Installing stress--shields on the interrupting L31--650EN/04


chambers

Column -- chambers coupling L31--716EN/01

Installing the operating device L31--7801EN/01

Installation, continued

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 7/8
Content
Instruction Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 D1402EN/01
E AREVA 8/8
Technical data
Technical characteristics

GL318 technical characteristics

Performances The table below gives the circuit--breaker performances :

Designation GL318
Standard IEC
Ur Rated voltage (r.m.s. value) kV 800
Ir Rated normal current A 4000
fr Rated frequency Hz 50
Ip Rated withstand current (peak value) kA 125
Ik Short--time withstand current (r.m.s. value) kA 50
Rated insulation level
(At sea level)
Rated short--duration power--frequency withstand
Ud
voltage (r.m.s. value)
D Phase--to--earth and phase--to--phase kV 830
D Across open contacts kV 1150
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak
Up
value)
D Phase--to--earth and phase--to--phase kV 2100
D Across open contacts kV 2100 (+455)
Rated breaking current in symmetrical short--
Isc kA 50
circuit
Rated making current (peak value) kA 125
Total break time ms 40 ±2
Rated operating sequence
O -- 0.3s -- CO -- 3min -- CO
Resistance of main contacts chamber without H.V. connectors
µΩ
(new contact) ≤ 80
The above characteristics are of a general nature, only those values given on
the circuit--breaker’s rating plates are contractually binding.

Continued on next page.

03--2006 L10--044EN/01
E AREVA 1/2
Technical data
Technical characteristics

GL318 technical characteristics, continued

Absolute pressures of The table below gives the absolute pressures of the SF6 gas mixture :
the SF6
gas mixture

Minimum admissible temperature


--32°C
up to
SF6 gas mixture absolute pressure
at 20°C(68°F)
pre Filling rated absolute pressure for the
0.75 MPa
insulation
pae Alarm absolute pressure for the insula- 0.67 MPa
tion (pme+0.03 MPa)
pme Minimal absolute pressure for the insula-
0.64 MPa
tion

SF6 The table below gives the masses of the SF6 gas :
gas masses

Mass for one three--pole circuit--breaker


SF6 mass 83.10 kg

The above characteristics are of a general nature, only those values given on
the circuit--breaker’s rating plates are contractually binding.

Operating device The table below gives low voltage components characteristics of the FK3--4
operating device :

Auxiliary voltages (usual) :


Ua Opening and closing circuits 48--110--125--220--250 V (cc)
Heating (and lighting) circuits 220 V (ac)
Motor 110--220 (cc) or 220 V (ac)
Consumption :
Closing and opening coils
Permanent heating 100 W / FK -- 50 W / cubicle
Thermostat heating (if temperature ≤+5°C) 250 W / cubicle
(≤+23°F)
Motor ≤ 1750 W

The above characteristics are of a general nature, only those values given on
the circuit--breaker’s rating plates are contractually binding.

03--2006 L10--044EN/01
E AREVA 2/2
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

Circuit-- breaker GL318 with spring operating mechanism FK3-- 4

Description The circuit--breaker is made up of three poles. Each pole is made up of two
interrupting modules connected by an electric connection. Each interrupting
module is controled by an operating device.

Pole parts table The table below gives the main parts of the pole :

C E

Mark Component Page


A Interrupting module 2
B Column 3
C Bearing structure 3
D Operating device 4
E Marshalling cubicle 5
F Electric connection 6

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 1/8
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

Interrupting module

Description The interrupting module is comprised of two interrupting chambers (1) -- in a


ceramic envelope -- equipped at each end with a corona ring (4) and an HV
terminal (5).
The interrupting chambers are laid out horizontally and attached, at their
base, to a common housing (6). This housing contains the mechanism used
to transfer the operating movement to the mobile contacts of both chambers.
The interrupting can also be equipped with capacitors (7).

Diagram
1
6

5 1

4
7

5 4

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 2/8
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

Column

Support column Consisting of two, three or four ceramic insulators, the support column (2)
allows the circuit--breaker to be ground--insulated and it also encloses the
operating tie--rod which is attached to the interrupting chamber’s moving con-
tacts.
The support column can also be equipped with a corona ring (13).

Housing of the A housing (3) -- situated at the base of the column -- contains the lever and
mechanism crank assembly and which operates the moving contact.

Diagram

13

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 3/8
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

Bearing structure

Description The support--frame (10) -- made up with four supports fastened to the housing
(3) -- supports all the circuit--breaker components.
The support--frame may be supplied by either AREVA or the customers.

Diagram
3

10

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 4/8
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

Operating device

Description The operating device (11) is a spring operating mechanism of the FK3--4 type.
The door of the operating device (11) is equipped with two windows. These
windows permit to display the optical signalization of the circuit--breaker state
and closing spring state.

Diagram

11

Fastening The operating device is fastened on the housing (3).

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 5/8
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

Marshalling cubicle

Description The marshalling cubicle (D) is fastened on the ground near the central
pole. Included with :
S The relays required to operate the circuit--breaker.
S The interconnection terminals boards.
S The terminals boards.

Diagram

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 6/8
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

Electrical connection

Description Two interrupting modules are connected by an electric connection (12).

Diagram

12

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 7/8
Description and operation
General description of the circuit-- breaker

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 L12--055EN/01
E AREVA 8/8
Description and operation
Description of the interrupting chambers

Presentation

Diagram

Parts table The table below gives the main parts of the interrupting chambers :

Mark Component Page


A Interrupting chamber 2
B Upper housing 3

06--2004 L12--105EN/02
E AREVA 1/4
Description and operation
Description of the interrupting chambers

Interrupting chamber

Quenching medium The quenching medium is pressurized SF6 gas or -- in particular instances --
pressurized SF6+CF4 gas mixture.

Interrupting principle The interrupting chamber is of thermal blasting type, using the energy from
the arc, with an auxiliary autopneumatic effect.

Diagram

1 2 4

Description The interrupting chamber has been designed in such a way as to increase the
mechanical resistance of the working part and take advantage of the low wear
rate of the contacts subjected to the arc in SF6. The working part is enclosed
in a leak tight ceramic envelope, providing insulation between the circuit--
breaker input and output.
The chamber is made up of the following elements :

Mark Component Information


(1) Envelope Can have a long creepage dis-
tance, depending on the pollution
level.
(2) Fixed contact
(4) Moving contact It is worked by the operating mech-
anism and contains the blasting
device.

06--2004 L12--105EN/02
E AREVA 2/4
Description and operation
Description of the interrupting chambers

Upper housing

Description The upper housing encloses the movement transfer mechanism (15) from the
operating tie--rod (8) to the moving contact (4) of the two chambers.

Diagram

4
4

15

Parts table The table below gives the housing internal and peripheral components :

Mark Component Function


(4) Moving contact It is worked by the operating mechanism
and contains the blasting device.
(8) Operating tie--rod Transmits the movement to the moving
contact of the two chambers.
(15) Mechanism Transfer of the movement.

06--2004 L12--105EN/02
E AREVA 3/4
Description and operation
Description of the interrupting chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L12--105EN/02
E AREVA 4/4
Description and operation
Pole operation
(Interrupting principle)

Presentation

Introduction In “CLOSED” position the current passes through :


-- the terminal (1),
-- the fixed contact support (2),
-- the main contacts (3),
-- the moving contact (4),
-- the moving contact support (5),
-- the common housing (6),
and follows the opposite chain on the other chamber and the terminal (1).

1 6 1

2 3 5
1 4

CIRCUIT--BREAKER “CLOSED” CLOSING SPRING “LOADED”

In this module This module contains the stages of the pole operation :

Stage Page
Opening 2
Closing 5

06--2004 L13--005EN/02
E AREVA 1/6
Description and operation
Pole operation
(Interrupting principle)

Opening

Opening When an electrical or manual opening order is given, the energy accumulated
in the opening spring (7) is released.

The insulating tie--rod (8), directly activated by the opening spring (7), trans-
mits the movement to the transfer mechanism (9) inside the housing which
causes the contacts to separate simultaneously in both chambers.

Continued on next page.

06--2004 L13--005EN/02
E AREVA 2/6
Description and operation
Pole operation
(Interrupting principle)

Opening, continued

Operation The table below gives the stages of opening :

Stage Description
Start of opening When the moving contact (4) separates from the main
contacts (3), the current is switched onto the arc con-
tacts (10). The compression of the (Vp) volume cau-
ses the first rise of pressure.

3 10 4 Vp
Thermal effect When the contacts (10) separate, the arc appears and
its energy causes the pressure to rise in the thermal
expansion volume (Vt), closed by the fixed contact rod
(11) and the insulating nozzle (12).

11 12 10 Vt
Interrupting and When the rod (11) comes out of the nozzle (12), the
assistance thermal overpressure in the volume (Vt) is released
at opening causing an energy blast to occur, just before the cur-
rent zero passage, ensuring final quenching of the arc.
The (Vp) volume pressure decreases to the ambient
pressure by means of the valve (13) to allow the end
of the opening.

11 12 Vt Vp 13

Continued on next page.

06--2004 L13--005EN/02
E AREVA 3/6
Description and operation
Pole operation
(Interrupting principle)

Opening, continued

Molecular sieve The arc has been extinguished.


The SF6 molecules, separated by the arc, are re--formed instantaneously.
Residual gases left over from the interruption operation are adsorbed by the
molecular sieve situated at the base of the pole. A few powdery compounds
are deposited in the form of dust which is quite harmless for the circuit break-
er.

Special case For small currents (example : operating no--load lines, transformers or ca-
of small currents pacitor banks), the thermal energy of the arc is too low to provide enough ex-
cess pressure.
Consequently, the conventional autopneumatic effect developing in the vol-
ume (Vp) is used mainly, to blast the arc.

Vp

06--2004 L13--005EN/02
E AREVA 4/6
Description and operation
Pole operation
(Interrupting principle)

Closing

Description When an electrical or manual closing order is given, the energy accumulated
in the closing spring (15) -- situated inside the operating device -- is released.
This energy is transmitted directly to the pole operating shaft (16), to ensure
closing.
The release of the energy stored up in the closing spring (15) causes displace-
ment of the moving parts -- and so the closing of the interrupting chambers
-- and also reloads the opening spring (7).

15

16

06--2004 L13--005EN/02
E AREVA 5/6
Description and operation
Pole operation
(Interrupting principle)
This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L13--005EN/02
E AREVA 6/6
Description and operation
Operating device of circuit--breaker

Presentation

Introduction The operating device is a spring operating mechanism of type FK3--4.


The operating mechanism is usually electrically remote--controlled.
During commissioning or when auxiliary voltage is lacking, operations can
also be performed directly on the mechanism.

Warning OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CON-


NECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRES-
SURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULA-
TION pme.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Description of the mechanism 2
Auxiliary fittings 3
Operating principle 5

05--2003 L14--005EN/03
E AREVA 1/6
Description and operation
Operating device of circuit--breaker

Description of the mechanism

Drive shaft D The main shaft (1) is linked up to the the circuit--breaker pole by means
of a cylinder (2).
D A damper (4) is linked up to the lever (32).
D In the “CLOSED” position, the main shaft (1) rests on the opening latch
(6) by means of the lever (5).
D In the “OPEN” position, the lever with roller (11) rests on the closing
cam (10).
D The opening spring (3) activates the lever (33) by means of the chain
(34). This spring is a pressure helical type.
NOTE : The levers (5)--(11)--(32) (33) form one piece only.

Closing shaft D On the closing shaft (7) are placed :


-- The inertia flywheel (8).
-- The closing cam (10).
-- The cam (26) that engages the limit switch (17) of the motor (12).
D The closing spring (9) activates the inertia flywheel (8) by means of the
chain (15). This spring is a pressure helical type.
The rotation torque -- created on the inertia flywheel (8) by means of the
loaded closing spring (9) -- is balanced by closing latch (14) / roller (16).

9
Diagram
15

17 34 3
33
30
2

8 1

32
11
12 4
10 6

7 31
11
16 14 26 5
32
5
33

34
11 33 17 12

05--2003 L14--005EN/03
E AREVA 2/6
Description and operation
Operating device of circuit--breaker

Auxiliary fittings

Reloading the closing The closing spring (9) is loaded by means of the reducing gears (13) and the
spring motor (12).

Auxiliary electric D The auxiliary contacts (30) are activated by a rod and a lever (31), the
fittings latter is activated by the main shaft (1).
D The limit switch of the motor (17) is activated by the cam (26)
The cam (26) is installed on the closing shaft (7).
D The closing latch (14) and the opening latch (6) are electrically activated
by coils (22) “Closing” and (27) “Opening”.

Auxiliary mechanical D The operating mechanism can be activated by the manual levers (24)
fittings “Closing” and (28) “Opening”.
WARNING : Operating the mechanism by the manual levers (24) “Closing”
and (28) “Opening” overrides electrical interlocks. Ensure it is electrically safe
to operate the equipment when using these levers to defeat electrical inter-
locks and lockouts.
D The indicator (29) gives the “OPEN” or “CLOSED” positions of the circuit--
breaker. An operation counter (36) gives the number of realized operations.
D The indicator (23) gives the “CHARGED” or “DISCHARGED” states of the
closing spring.
D If the auxiliary current supply fails, the hand--held crank (21) permits the
closing spring to be fully charged.

Diagram
9
30
17

34
1
23 6
29

12 27
7

26
31 28
14 22
21 13 24

05--2003 L14--005EN/03
E AREVA 3/6
Description and operation
Operating device of circuit--breaker

Operating principle

Warning OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CON-


NECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRES-
SURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULA-
TION pme.

Closing D When the closing coil is energized or the manual closing lever is operated,
the closing latch (14) releases the inertia flywheel (8).
D The closing shaft (7) effects a 180° rotation generated by the loaded clos-
ing spring (9).
D The cam (10) rotates the main shaft (1) by means of the lever with roller
(11). After a 60° rotation, the lever (5) rests on the opening latch (6).
D Simultaneously, the opening spring (3) is loaded by means of the chain (34)
activated by the rotation of the lever (33).
D A freewheel, installed on the gear wheel (19), avoids the reducing gears
(13) and the motor (12) being driven by the gear wheel of the inertia flywheel
(8).
NOTE : A mechanical device (not shown) prevents all closing opera-
tions if the circuit--breaker is already in the “CLOSED” position.

Diagram

34
3
33
1

5
12 11 27
7
10
22

24 28
13 19 14

Continued on next page.

05--2003 L14--005EN/03
E AREVA 4/6
Description and operation
Operating device of circuit--breaker

Operating principle, continued

Reloading the closing D When the motor (12) is supplied with current, it immediately starts to load
spring the closing spring (9) by means of the reducing gears (13) of the inertia fly-
wheel (8) and the chain (15).
D At the full stroke, the gear (19) is at the no tooth sector of the inertia flywheel
(8) and the reducing gears (13) can decelerate without causing strain on the
closing latch (14).
NOTE : During the loading of the closing spring, the supplying circuit
of the closing coil is cut to avoid an untimely closing operation.

Diagram
9

15

8
14
19
12 13 19

Continued on next page.

05--2003 L14--005EN/03
E AREVA 5/6
Description and operation
Operating device of circuit--breaker

Operating principle, continued

Opening D When the opening coil (27) is energized or the manual opening lever (28)
is operated, the opening latch (6) releases the lever (5).
D The main shaft (1) effects a 60° clockwise rotation -- generated by the
loaded opening spring (3) -- before reaching the circuit--breaker “OPEN” posi-
tion.
D A damper (4) dampens the excess energy to smoothly finish travel.

Diagram

3
60°
1

6
4

5
27

28

05--2003 L14--005EN/03
E AREVA 6/6
Description and operation
SF6 gas monitoring

Presentation

Introduction The circuit--breaker uses pressurized SF6 gas as electric arc quenching gas.
The SF6 gas pressure monitoring is essential to assure the circuit--breaker
performances.

Principle There is two SF6 gas pressure monitoring types :


D Permanent monitoring with the help of a threshold densimeter.
D Periodic monitoring with the help of a dial densimeter (visual control)

Symbols IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics.

Symbol Designation
pre Filling rated pressure for the insulation
pae Alarm pressure for the insulation
pme Minimal pressure for the insulation

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Gas pressure and density 2
Pressure measurement 3
Measuring density 4
Densimeter 5

09--2004 L20--001EN/06
E AREVA 1/6
Description and operation
SF6 gas monitoring

Gas pressure and density

Introduction The electrical characteristics of switchgear depend on the density of SF6 gas
i.e. the mass of gas pumped into a compartment of a given volume.

Constant At constant temperature, an increase of gas density results in a higher gas


temperature pressure against the walls of compartment.

Constant density At constant density, with an fixed compartment volume, the pressure
changes in the same way as the temperature. Since the gas density re-
mains invariable owing to the fact that no modification occurs in the quanti-
ty of gas or the volume of the relevant compartment, the electrical charac-
teristics of the switchgear will remain unchanged.

Conclusion Since it is difficult to measure the gas density directly, it is essential to


know accurately its absolute pressure and temperature.

09--2004 L20--001EN/06
E AREVA 2/6
Description and operation
SF6 gas monitoring

Pressure measurement

Effective pressure ? Absolute pressure = effective pressure + atmospheric pressure


Absolute pressure ?

Pressure Description Diagram


The pressure of SF6 gas is mea-
sured by of a standard pressure Standard pressure gauge
gauge with a deformable diaphragm
actuating an indicating pointer.
One surface of the diaphragm is in
contact with the SF6 gas, while the
other is in contact with the atmo-
sphere. The difference between the
Effective gas and the atmosphere is thus
measured, taking atmospheric
pressure as a reference. This is the
measurement of the effective pres-
sure of the SF6 gas.
SF6

Atmospheric pressure

If the deformable diaphragm, one


Absolute
surface of which is in contact with
pressure gauge
the SF6 gas, blocks a volume where
a vacuum has been developed, the
pressure gauge measures the pres-
sure difference between that of the
SF6 gas and the vacuum. Since the
latter is zero, the pressure gauge
measures the absolute pressure of
the gas.
The absolute pressure of the SF6
gas, independent of atmospheric
pressure, reflects the quantity of
Absolute gas introduced into the compart- SF6
ment and hence its density at the
present temperature. Vacuum volume
This is measured by means of an
absolute pressure gauge which is
less generally used and more deli-
cate than a effective pressure
gauge. This is the reason why a ef-
fective pressure gauge is used, pro-
vision being made for corrections
required by atmospheric pressure
variations resulting from atmo-
spheric disturbances and differ-
ences of elevation.

09--2004 L20--001EN/06
E AREVA 3/6
Description and operation
SF6 gas monitoring

Measuring density

Pressure units D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa).


D The practical unit is the bar (14.503 p.s.i.)
1 bar = 1,000 hPa
1 bar = 100 kPa
10 bar = 1 MPa
D Standard atmospheric pressure is equal to 101.3 kPa at sea level and an
air temperature of 20°C (68°F).

Measuring density When it is not possible to directly measure density, this may be checked
using an industrial pressure gauge capable of measuring the effective
pressure.
An effective pressure value corresponds to the rated density, determined
for normal atmospheric pressure (101.3 kPa) and an ambient temperature
of 20°C (68°F).
For each pressure reading (filling, inspection of densimeter thresholds...), the
rated effective pressure should be corrected according to the ambient tem-
perature and atmospheric pressure of the site at the time the reading is taken.
See the module “Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure to using the
pressure gauge (tool)”.

The real pressure is therefore :

Preal = Prated effective in accordance with temperature + ∆Pp*

* ∆Pp : correction in accordance with atmospheric pressure.

09--2004 L20--001EN/06
E AREVA 4/6
Description and operation
SF6 gas monitoring

Densimeter

Function D Permanent SF6 gas density monitoring.


D Visual SF6 gas real pressure information (MPa -- psi).

Localization The densimeter is situated onto the bottom of the pole of the circuit--breaker,
and joined to the gas volume of the circuit--breaker.

Working The densimeter is fitted with internal contacts. These contacts close succes-
sively if the gas’s density diminishes and determine 2 distinct thresholds.
These contacts are wired to the terminal block inside the cubicle and are usu-
ally left at the user’s disposal for the following use :
D Alarm pressure ”pae” acts as a warning (topping up necessary).
D Minimum functional pressure for insulation ”pme” must be used either to
lock the circuit--breaker in position or to cause automatic opening. The option
is chosen by the client in keeping with operating requirements.

All the circuit--breaker’s rated performances are guaranteed up to the mini-


mum specified ambient temperature and the minimum functional pressure for
insulation ”pme”.

Continued on next page.

09--2004 L20--001EN/06
E AREVA 5/6
Description and operation
SF6 gas monitoring

Densimeter, continued

Reading the dial The dial is divided into three colored areas : Green, Yellow and Red. The posi-
tion of the needle indicates the SF6 gas absolute pressure value.

-1

Needle position Colored area Direction

GREEN None

Perform a topping--up
YELLOW
operation.

Abnormally low density,


find the origin of the
leak and contact
RED AREVA T&D S.A.
After--sales Service.

09--2004 L20--001EN/06
E AREVA 6/6
Packaging -- Shipping and storage
Packaging - Identification - Storage

Presentation

Information The different parts of the poles (chambers and column) are filled with nitrogen
(N2) for transport purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20°C
(68°F) and 101.3 kPa.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Packaging 2
Identifying sub--assemblies and their packaging 3
Storage 4

05--2006 L22--007EN/03
E AREVA 1/6
Packaging -- Shipping and storage
Packaging - Identification - Storage

Packaging

Introduction For transport, the different parts of the apparatus are divided--up between
several cases :
S Interrupting chambers.
S Columns + (corona rings, electrical connections ...).
S Operating devices : each operating device is vacuum--wrapped in a pro-
tective bag containing desiccants.
S Frames if the latter is supplied by AREVA.
S The SF6 bottle(s) or -- in particular instances -- SF6 bottle(s) and CF4
bottle(s).
S Marshalling cubicle.
S Assembly products (grease, oil, etc.) used for installation.
S Capacitors (if the apparatus is equipped with these).

Characteristics of The table below gives the characteristics of the circuit--breaker components
packaging cases packaging cases depending on the apparatus :
Packaging case Length Width Height Gross weight
Qty
type cm cm cm kg
Interrupting cham-
bers 2 513 181 136
x 3
Columns
2 627 191 105
(4 insulators)
Frame
2 546 96 96
(H = 4877 mm)
Operating device 2 318 103 144
SF6 gas *
(SF6+CF SF gas *
6
4)
gas
CF4 gas *
mixture
Marshalling cubicle 1 131 76 172 284
Necessities (prod-
ucts) 1 60 60 70 37
for assembly
Capacitors * 2 266 141 124

* Depending of the apparatus


NOTE : the values in the above table are given as an indication so
that an appropriate means of lifting can be envisaged.

05--2006 L22--007EN/03
E AREVA 2/6
Packaging -- Shipping and storage
Packaging - Identification - Storage

Identifying sub-- assemblies and their packaging

Introduction Each circuit--breaker sub--assembly (poles, operating mechanism, etc.) is


identified by a plate giving its reference numbers.
These numbers are marked on the packaging cases of each sub--assembly.

Example of marking -- Manufacturer reference No. = 108 657


and identifying
-- Circuit--breaker identification No. 01
-- Phase number : 3
-- Position in the same phase : 1
IDENTIFICATION OF SUB---
MARKING OF ASSEMBLIES AND TOOLING
PACKAGING CASES

2 MANUFACTURER
REFERENCE No.
1

101 525 0010 108 657 0010


no SÉRIE
0101 Rep. 01/3-- 1

POSITION IN
CASE No.
THE SAME
PHASE

CIRCUIT--BREAKER PHASE
IDENTIFICATION No. NUMBER

Place of the plates Choose and install the components identified by the plate (1).

1 108 657 0010


no SÉRIE
01/1-- 2 Rep. 01/3-- 1

01/1-- 1
01/2-- 2

01/2-- 1 01/3-- 2

01/3-- 1

OUTSIDE PLATE

INSIDE PLATE

05--2006 L22--007EN/03
E AREVA 3/6
Packaging -- Shipping and storage
Packaging - Identification - Storage

Storage

Introduction The storage procedures defined below are for storage times of less than 2
years. For longer periods, special packaging must be designed and appropri-
ate procedures devised.

Short--term storage The apparatus must be stored in its transport packaging and placed on beams
(6 months) in a flood--proof place.

Medium--term storage The table below indicate how to stock the main components of the circuit---
(less than 2 years) breaker for a medium--term storage :

Component Storage
The apparatus must be stored with its
Components transport packaging open whilst
of the circuit--breaker pole placed on beams in a closed (indoor),
but ventilated, flood--proof place.
The operating device should be
stored in the same place as the cir-
cuit--breaker, these two sub--assem-
blies being inseparable. Check that
the vacuum packaging is leak--tight.
If this has been damaged, proceed as
follows :
Operating device S The operating device should be
placed so that air can enter through
the vents of the rear plate and side
panels.
S In order to prevent corrosion dam-
age due to formation of condensation,
it is mandatory that the heating circuit
be switched on.

Continued on next page.

05--2006 L22--007EN/03
E AREVA 4/6
Packaging -- Shipping and storage
Packaging - Identification - Storage

Storage

The centralizing cubicle should be


stored in the same place as the cir-
cuit--breaker and the operating
device, these three sub--assemblies
being inseparable.
Centralizing cubicle S In order to prevent corrosion dam-
age due to formation of condensation,
it is mandatory that the heating circuit
be switched on. Put vetically the
centtralizing cubicle for that air can
enter through the vents.

ANY CHANGE OF LOCATION OF THE APPARATUS (EVEN AFTER COM-


MISSIONING) SHOULD BE DONE AT A REDUCED PRESSURE OF
0.03 MPa.

05--2006 L22--007EN/03
E AREVA 5/6
Packaging -- Shipping and storage
Packaging - Identification - Storage

This page is intentionally blank.

05--2006 L22--007EN/03
E AREVA 6/6
Installation
Erection general instructions

Erection general instructions

Instructions The table below gives the instructions of environment to respect for the erec-
of environment tion :

Instruction Comment
Verify the Civil engineering work : dimensions,
levels of concrete pads (structure fixation), in
A accordance with the tolerances given by Civil
work standards (refer to circuit--breaker out-
line).

Avoid any dust production and masonry work


B
during erection of the circuit--breaker.

Erection The table below gives the instructions to respect for proper erection of the cir-
instructions cuit--breaker :

Instruction Comment
Read all the “Installation” modules completely
before beginning erection works.
1 The erection instructions describe all the proce-
dures to be carried out as well as their chrono-
logical order.

Handle sub--assemblies in a correct manner,


2
particularly insulators.

The shipping case should be open as required


during erection procedures.
3
CAUTION : Respect sub--assemblies iden-
tification.

When shipping covers are removed, proceed to


the next assembly sequence in as short as pos-
4 sible time.
Store the shipping covers under shelter, for a
possible future use.

Respect references to other modules,


5
i.e. :“Tightening torques”.

Warning No responsibility is taken over by AREVA T&D S.A. for damages and dis-
turbances resulting out of non--adherence to the “Installation” modules.

06--2004 L30--002EN/01
E AREVA 1/2
Installation
Erection general instructions

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L30--002EN/01
E AREVA 2/2
Installation
Tightening torques

Presentation

Introduction In the assembling with screws, all the fastening screws must be “greased” be-
fore torque tightening.

Products used The table below gives the list of the used products for the screws before tight-
ening :

Designation AREVA item Supplier Supplier item


reference reference
--01835208 MOBILPLEX 47
Grease MOBIL OIL
(1kg box) MOBILUX EP3
--01835118 CONTACTAL
Contact grease EPMF
(200g tube) HPG
--01835265
Silicon grease SAMARO MOLYKOTE 111
(100g tube)
--01818327
Glue LOCTITE LOCTITE 225
(250ml)

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Screw greasing before tightening 2
Tightening torques values 3

06--2004 L31--001EN/01
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Tightening torques

Screw greasing before tightening

Choice of the The table below gives the product to use for the screws before tightening de-
product to use pending on the assembling type :

If assembling... Product to use ...


MOBILPLEX 47
usual
MOBILUX EP3
electrical connections CONTACTAL HPG

Can be
Product ...
dismantled ?
with seals
YES MOLYKOTE 111
NO LOCTITE 225

Where to apply The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriate
the product ? product before tightening depending on the assembling type :

If assembling... With screws With bolts

usual

electrical connections

Tapping or threading

with seals
Tapping or threading

06--2004 L31--001EN/01
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Tightening torques

Tightening torques values

Values table The tool and the tightening method must be such that the torque actually ap-
plied to the screw head corresponds with the reference torque shown in the
table below, to within a tolerance of ± 20%.

TIGHTENING TORQUES
in daN.m
daN m
STEEL SCREWS

CLASS 6.8
or
CLASS 8.8
88
STAINLESS A2--70, A4--70
STAINLESS A2--80, A4--80

M2,5 0,05 0,06


M3 0,09 0,11
M4 0,19 0,26
M5 0,38 0,51
M6 0,66 0,88
M8 1,58 2,11
M10 3,20 4,27
M12 4,97 6,63
M14 8,67 11,56
M16 13,42 17,90
M20 26,22 34,98
M24 45,68 60,93
M30 90,44 120,65

06--2004 L31--001EN/01
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Tightening torques

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L31--001EN/01
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Erection general procedures

Presentation

Introduction During the erection of the circuit--breaker, some particular mounting or check-
ing operations will be realized.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Preparing and installing static seals 2
Screw sealing 3
Using a water pressure gauge 5

06--2004 L31--003EN/01
E AREVA 1/6
Installation
Erection general procedures

Preparing and installing static seals

Necessary products List of the AREVA products necessary for the installing :
AREVA
Diagram Designation
reference

--01861262 Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835265 MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)

Process The table below gives the steps of installing static seals :
Step Action Comment
1 Clean bearing grooves and sur-
faces using ISOPROPANOL.
2 Rid the seal of all foreign bodies Check the condition of the seal
such as paintbrush bristles or fil- which should present no
ings... scratches or deformation (it
Remove (where applicable) the should be neither flattened,
color identification point with fin- stretched, nor broken).
gernail, never with a sharp instru-
ment.
3 Lightly lubricate the seal by hand Do not use a brush to do this.
using MOLYKOTE 111 grease. Eliminate excess grease by
squeezing the seal between
fingers, leaving only a thin layer
on the entire surface.
4 Put the seal(s) in place.
5 Lubricate both bearing surfaces Do not put grease on the inside
with MOLYKOTE 111. surface.
Fill the residual volume of the
seal’s outside groove with grease.

Only seals are


Greasing greased in this zone Greasing
zone zone

06--2004 L31--003EN/01
E AREVA 2/6
Installation
Erection general procedures

Screw sealing

Introduction To prevent humidity from penetrating SF6 gaskets, the outer mounting screws
should be sealed by applying an appropriate product.
NOTE : This procedure should be applied to all assemblages of parts
submitted to SF6 pressure and electrical connection assembling.

Necessary products List of the AREVA products and accessories necessary for the screw seal-
ing :

AREVA
Diagram Designation
reference

--01818327 LOCTITE 225 (250ml)

--01835265 MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)

--01835118 CONTACTAL HPG (200g tube)

Choice of the The table below gives the product to use for the screw sealing depending on
product to use the assembling type :

If assembling... Product to use ...

Can be
Product ...
dismantled ?
with seals
YES MOLYKOTE 111
NO LOCTITE 225

electrical connections CONTACTAL HPG

Continued on next page.

06--2004 L31--003EN/01
E AREVA 3/6
Installation
Erection general procedures

Screw sealing, continued

Where to apply The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriate
the product ? product before tightening depending on the assembling type :

Assembling with screws Assembling with bolts

Tapping or threading

Tapping or threading

06--2004 L31--003EN/01
E AREVA 4/6
Installation
Erection general procedures

Using a water pressure gauge

Introduction In each assemblage performed using a double seal (1) and (2), the volume
(3) communicates with the outside by a channel (4), blocked--off by a plug (5)
or (6), so that leak--tightness can be checked.

4
6
5

Process The table below gives the steps of the leak--tightness checking using a
water pressure gauge :

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the leak test plug (5) or (6)
and its seal (7) if necessary, leave 5 7
open for half an hour.

2...3 turns 6

2 Connect up the water pressure gauge


(8), using the adapter (9) or (10).
10

8
9

3 Fill the water pressure gauge’s U tube


to half way up.
NOTE : If temperature is less
than 0°C, use an anti--freeze mix- H
ture instead of water.
D After a few minutes note the water R2
column level R1. R1
D Note the water column level R2
again after half an hour.
The displacement H should be less
than 10 mm.
4 At the end of the inspection, pull the
adapter of the water pressure gauge
and replace the leak test plug (5) or (6)
and its seal (7), where required. 5 7
6

06--2004 L31--003EN/01
E AREVA 5/6
Installation
Erection general procedures

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L31--003EN/01
E AREVA 6/6
Installation
Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2)
in pole parts

Presentation

Introduction The pole parts (chambers and columns) are filled with nitrogen (N2) for trans-
port purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20°C and 101.3 kPa.

It is of prime importance that the presence of N2 gas in pole be verified


before going any further with installation.

Necessary tools List of the necessary AREVA tools for the checking for presence of N2 gas in
poles :

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(3) Filling tool 1

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns 2
Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers 4

03--2008 L31--074EN/01
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2)
in pole parts

Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns

Opening the case of


Remove only the cover of the case. Remove packaging protection , to
the columns
free the housing (7) of the column.
NOTE : Keep the packaging protection , for later utilization.

Visual inspection Begin visual inspection to check the condition of ceramic envelopes. Make
of the column sure that their enamel has not been chipped or in any way damaged during
transportation.

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L31--074EN/01
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2)
in pole parts

Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns, continued

Process The table below gives the steps of manual checking for presence of N2 gas
in columns :

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the plug (1) and install
the filling tool (3), tighten the fill-
ing tool BY HAND.

1 3

2 Unscrew the valve--cap (4) and


press on the valve briefly :
some gas should escape.

If no gas is expelled, contact


our Customer Service.

3 D Replace the valve--cap (4)


and remove the filling tool (3). 1
D Re--install the plug (1), ap-
plying a tightening torque of
4 daN.m; leak--tightness is
only guaranteed if this condi-
tion is respected.

3
4

03--2008 L31--074EN/01
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2)
in pole parts

Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers

Comment A transport cover (5) is installed on the housing (6) common to both interrup-
tion chambers. This cover is equipped with a test valve, in turn protected by
a plug (8). The case is fitted with a outside trap--door to have access to the
transport cover.

Process The table below gives the steps of checking for presence of N2 gas in the inter-
rupting chambers (case trap--door removed) :
Step Action Diagram
1 Remove the plug (8) by undoing
the screws (9) and briefly press on 7
the valve clapper (7) : some gas
should escape. 8

If no gas is expelled, contact 9


our Customer Service.

2 Re--install the plug (8) using the


9
screws (9).
8

x 2

H M6--20
0,7 daN.m

03--2008 L31--074EN/01
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Presentation

Reminder Frames may be supplied by either AREVA or the customer.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Components necessary for the operation 2
Support--frame components (per pole) 3
Preparing the column 5
Frame--support assembly 6
Installing the lifting tools 10

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 1/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Components necessary for the operation

Necessary product Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary for the installing :


Mark Diagram Designation Number

Lifting strap
(1) 2
(3 m)

Handling The support--frame assembly operations and lifting


the pole should be performed by at least two per-
sons.

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 2/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Support-- frame components (per pole)

Introduction If the support--frame is supplied by AREVA, check the necessary compo-


nents to the assembling.

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling :


components
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(2) Support 2

(3) Support 2

Screws
(5) 1
H M16-45

Screws
(7) 16
H M16-35

Washer
(9) 16
NORDLOCK NL16 SS

Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 3/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Support-- frame components (per pole), continued

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling :


components,
continued

Mark Diagram Designation Number

Screws
(20) 16
H M16-45

(21) Strengthening piece 2

(24) Strengthening piece 4

(25) Strengthening piece 2

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 4/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Preparing the column

Dismantling the case Remove the side panels of the case.


of the poles NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B and
C.

Preparing the pole D Sling the “A” column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1).
D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood cover
laying :
-- first, the end of the column,
-- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensure
the correct installing of the frame supports.

X minimum = 260 mm

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 5/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :
Step Action
1 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).
-- Install the screw (5) only on this support.

10

x1 3
5
2x2
9 H M16--45
7

H M16--35

2 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).

2
10

2x2
9
7

H M16--35

Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 6/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly, continued

Process, continued The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :
Step Action
3 Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support
(2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the
supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the
frame--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20).

x4
20

3
25
21 H M16--45

4 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).
10

2x2
9
7

2
H M16--35
5 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).
10

2x2
9
7

H M16--35
Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 7/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly, continued

Process, continued The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :
Step Action
6 Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support
(3) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the
supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the
frame--support (2). Do not tighten the screws (20).

21
3

2x2
20
25

21
H M16--45

2 25

7 Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support with


the use of the screws (20).

x2
20
24

24
H M16--45

x2
20
24

24
H M16--45

Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 8/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly, continued

Process, continued The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :

Step Action
8 Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques.

18 daN.m

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 9/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Installing the lifting tools

Necessary tools List of the lifting tools to install on the frame :


Mark Diagram Designation Number

(14) Lifting shackle 4

(15) Ring bolt 4

(16) Washer 8

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the lifting tools on the support---
frame :

Step Action
1 Install the lifting shackle (14) in the holes of the frame.
2 Install the ring bolts (15) on the base of the frame, inserting the thick
washers (16).

14

x4 16

15

10--2006 L31--137EN/02
E AREVA 10/10
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Presentation

Identification Before the chambers -- column coupling, check that interrupting chambers
and column reference numbers are the right ones.

Coupling duration The final chambers -- column coupling operations must be realized in dura-
tion no longer than 40 min.
NOTE : The coupling operations should be performed by at least two
persons.

T(max) ≤ 40 min

Lifting equipment Provide for appropriate lifting equipment :


(3,000 daN) (minimum)
H+2m

H
H+1m

Coupling steps The chambers -- column coupling must be done in several steps :
Step Topic Page
A Positioning the case of the chambers 2
B Preparing the interrupting chambers 3
C Preparing the column stress--shields 4
D Preparing the necessary components for the coupling 5
E Lifting and preparing the column 7

F Final coupling 8

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 1/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Positioning the case of the chambers

Introduction To facilitate the lifting of the poles, and to work in complete safety, it is essen-
tial that the cases be positioned correctly in relation to the lifting equip-
ment.

Positioning of the Using the lifting equipment, position the first case in such a way that :
case S the axis chambers is perpendicular with the lifting plane.
S the space between the case and the lifting equipment is superior of the col-
umn fitted with the frame “L” + 2 m.

NOTE : The cradle of the first chamber will be use for the column--
chambers coupling of the three poles.

Diagram

L+2m

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 2/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Preparing the interrupting chambers

Dismantling the case Remove the cover and the side panels of the case.
of the chambers

Rotation With two flexible lifting straps, revolve the chambers of 180° and make the
of the chambers transport cover level.
NOTE : Orient the housing (2) in such a way the bosse is situated
on the lifting equipment side.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 3/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Preparing the column stress-- shields

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(33) Stress--shields ring 1

(32) Bracket 4

Screws
(34) 4
H M10-30

Assembling Install the brackets (32) on the stress--shields ring (33) using screws (34)
do not tighten.
32

33
x 4
34 H M10--30

Positioning Install temporarily the stress--shields ring (33) -- brackets (32) to chambers
side -- around the housing (2).

32 33

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 4/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Preparing the necessary components for the coupling

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the coupling :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(12) Seal 1

Screw
(14) H M16--60 (19 mm) 8
H M16--70 (30 mm)

Washer
(15) 16
M16

(16) Nut 8

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 5/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Preparing the necessary components for the coupling, continued

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA tools necessary for the coupling :
tools

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(7) Stop 1

(8) Lever 1

(17) “Short” Centering spindle


1
(18) “Long” Centering spindle

Rigid electric wire


(21) 1
(80 cm)

(19) Protection tool 1

(20) Tool for installing the coupling pin 1

(25) Screwing tool 1

Necessary products S MOLYKOTE M111 grease : greasing contact surface.


S LOCTITE 225 : screw sealing.
S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 6/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Lifting and preparing the column

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary :


Mark Diagram Designation Number

Lifting strap
(45) 4
(3 m)

Process The table below gives the steps of lifting the column :
Step Action Diagram
1 Install the strands of the lifting
strap (45) on the lifting tool at 45
the end of the supports.
x4

2 Lift the column.

3 Hang up the column so as to


operate on its extremity.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 7/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling

Column orientation Orient the column (1) in such a way the support (3) of the operating mech-
anism is situated on the same side as the boss of the housing (2).

Assembling the Assemble sections A, B and C of the spindles (17) and (18), without over--
centering spindles tightening, so that these can be removed later without difficulty.
NOTE : Spindle (18) is longer than spindle (17).

17
C
18
B
A

Deflating the S Remove the plug (5) from the transport cover (4) and press valve (6) to
chambers bring the volume of chambers back to ambient pressure.
REMINDER : transport gas pressure : nitrogen (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 20°C
(101.3 kPa).
S Install the plug (5).

6 5

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 8/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Removing the The table below gives the steps of removing the transport cover of the
transport cover of the interrupting chambers :
interrupting
chambers

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the screws (13) and
introduce the lever (8) into the x 8 4
braces (9). Draw on the lever (8)
to open the cover (4). 13
9

H M16--55

2 Start of the timing.


(The final chambers -- column
coupling operations must be
realized in duration no longer
than 40 min).
3 Draw the cover (4) in order to
give off the cylinder (10). 25
Using the screwing tool (25), to 4
unscrew the cylinder (10) in
order to release the axis (11).

11

10

4 Introduce the stop (7) and install


the tool for removing the cou-
pling pin (20).
Remove the pin (11) and the
transport cover (4)
20 4
11

Continued on next page.


04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 9/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Installing the Install the centering spindles (17) and (18) so that these come to rest against
centering spindles the sphere of housing (2), tighten the nuts (30) a little.
Install the screws (39) on the centering spindles (17) and (18).
Place the protection tool (19).

17 18

39 19
39

30

2
30

Removing the cover The table below gives the steps of removing the cover of the column :
of the column

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the screws (23) and
open the cover (22).

22

x 8
23

H M16--55

2 Turn the cover (22) of 90° in


order to deposit it.

22

Continued on next page.


04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 10/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Installing the seal The table below gives the steps of installing the seal :

Step Action Diagram


1 Clean contact surfaces ”A” and
“B” using ISOPROPANOL.
Lubricate only the surface ”B”
with MOLYKOTE M111 A
grease.

2 Install a new seal (12), referring


to “Preparing and installing
static seals”.

See the module “Erection


general procedures”.
A

12

3 install a rigid electric wire (21)


-- temporarily -- in order to pre-
vent the “unsticking” of the seal
(12) during the column -- cham-
bers coupling

12 21

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 11/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Mounting The table below gives the steps of mounting the chambers -- column cou-
coupling pin pling pin :
Step Action Diagram
1 Move down slowly the column
(1) introducing the centring
spindles (17) and (18) into the 1
holes of the flange.

26 18
17
2 Move down slowly the column 10
to align the hole of the cylinder
(10) with the hole of the tie--rod
(26).

3 Insert the coupling pin (11)


installed on the tool (20).

20
4 Remove the tool (20).

11
20

5 Remove the protection tool


(19) and the stop (7).
Using the screwing tool (25),
screw the cylinder (10) until
stop. 25

10

19

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 12/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Chambers/column The table below gives the steps of chambers/column coupling :


connection

Step Action Diagram


1 Clean contact surfaces ”A” and
“B” using ISOPROPANOL.
Lubricate only the surface ”B”
with MOLYKOTE M111 grease.
Remove the rigid electric wire
(21) 21

B
A

2 Move the seal (12) to the the


housing of the interrupting
chambers.
Move the screws (28) of the
centring spindles.

28
12
28

3 Continue slowly lowering the


column until the first sections of
the centring spindles (17) and (C)
(18), which are no longer useful, 17
can be removed in the following 18
order : (28)
-- first section (C)
-- screws (28)
-- second section (B) (B)
NOTE : The purpose of this
operation is to avoid damag-
ing the ceramic fin of the col-
umn.

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 13/14
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Chambers/column The table below gives the steps of chambers/column coupling :


connection

Step Action Diagram


4 Move down the column on the
housing (2) of the chambers.
Place the stress--shields ring
14
x6
33
(33) on the extremity of the col-
umn and attach the whole using
screws (14), washers (15) and
special nut (16) referring to
15
x 4
“Screw sealing”. 16 H M10--30
3,2 daN.m
See the module “Erection gen-
eral procedures”.
H M16--60 (70) 34
Tighten the nuts (16) to the rec- 13,5 daN.m
ommended torques, holding the
head of the screws (14).

5 Tighten the screws (34) to the


recommended torques.
2

6 End of coupling, stop the timing


and note the time passed.

7 Remove the last section (A) and


14
nut (30) of the centring spindles.
Install the last screws (14), 15
washers (15) and special nut
(16) referring to “Screw seal- 15
(A)
ing”. 16

See the module “Erection gen-


eral procedures”.
x2
H M16--60 (70)
Tighten the nuts (16) to the rec- 13,5 daN.m
ommended torques, holding the
head of the screws (14).

30

04--2005 L31--715EN/01
E AREVA 14/14
Installation
Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker
and vacuum operation

Presentation

Introduction The column--chambers coupling is now finished -- the pole is yet maintained
by the lifting equipment. In order to continue the pole installation, it is neces-
sary now to lay it on the ground.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Tipping down the pole of the circuit--breaker 2
Vacuum operation 3
Protection of the interrupting chambers 4

06--2004 L31--721EN/02
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker
and vacuum operation

Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker

Process The table below gives the steps of tipping down the pole of the circuit--
breaker :

Step Action
1 Using the lifting device, slowly tip down the pole around the axis of
the interrupting chambers until the ground.

Pay attention to do not damage the stress--shields ring (11).


2 Lay the supports of the frame on two wood boards (12).
3 Remove the flexible lifting straps (15).
4 Remove the ring bolts (13) and the thick washers (14).

14 x4
11

13

15

12

06--2004 L31--721EN/02
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker
and vacuum operation

Vacuum operation

Principle The procedure of the vacuum operation depends on the duration of cham-
bers/column coupling.

Process See module :

-- “Connection the vacuum pump.


-- “Vacuum operation”.

06--2004 L31--721EN/02
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker
and vacuum operation

Protection of the interrupting chambers

Introduction It is important to protect the insulators of the interrupting chambers during the
next operations (installing the terminals, installing the capacitors ...)

Process To protect the interrupting chambers, use packaging protection , retained


from the opening of the column case.

06--2004 L31--721EN/02
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Presentation

Diagram

01/1-- 1
01/2-- 1
01/3-- 1
01/1-- 2
01/2-- 2
01/3-- 2

01/1-- 2

01/1-- 1
01/2-- 2

01/2-- 1 01/3-- 2

01/3-- 1

XXX XXX 0010


no SÉRIE
Rep. 01/3-- 1

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Components, products and accessories 2
Preparing the contact surfaces 3
Installing terminal 4

08--2004 L31--734EN/01
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Components, products and accessories

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Terminal 1

Screws
(3) 4
H M12--45

Necessary products List of the AREVA products and accessories necessary for the installing :
and accessories

AREVA
Diagram Designation
reference

--01861262 Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835106 Vaseline 204--9

--01835118 Contactal grease

--01831320 Abrasive paper A400

--02212337 Scotch Brite A--VF

--02212334 Rag

--02211842 Round brush No.4

--02211831 Brush No.16

08--2004 L31--734EN/01
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Preparing the contact surfaces

Preparing the The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease.
contact grease CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease

Preparing the The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :
contact surfaces

Step Action Diagram


01/1-- 2
01/2-- 2 X2

01/3-- 2
Remove the temporary screws
1 from the terminal pads X1 or X1
X2. 01/1-- 1
01/2-- 1
01/3-- 1

2 Dry rub with fine emery cloth.

3 Eliminate the dust produced.

4 Coat with CONTACT


GREASE.

5 Wipe with a clean rag, leaving


just a thin layer of grease.

6 Rub over the grease with wa-


terproof abrasive paper A400.

08--2004 L31--734EN/01
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Installing terminal

Process Assemble immediately the terminal (1) on one interrupting chamber (2) after
preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminal using screws (3); use
CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.

01/1-- 1
2 01/2-- 1
2 01/3-- 1
2

01/1-- 2
01/2-- 2
01/3-- 2

x 4
3
H M12--45
5 daN.m 1

Comment D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be :


R £ 2mW
D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in the
same way.

08--2004 L31--734EN/01
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Presentation

Diagram

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary :


Mark Diagram Designation Number

Lifting strap
(12) 2
(3 m)

In this module This module contains the following topics :


Topic Page
Components and products 2
Preparing the capacitors 3
Installing the capacitors 4

12--2004 L31--741EN/03
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Components and products

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Capacitor 2

(3) Support 2

Support
(4) 2
or (depending on the apparatus)

Screws
(5) 8
H M12-30

Screws
(8) 4
H M12-45

Screws
(9) 4
H M12-25

(1) Spacer 4

Necessary products S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

12--2004 L31--741EN/03
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Preparing the capacitors

Installing S Install the support (3) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).
the supports
S Install the support (4) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

x 2
5
4

4
x 2 H M12--30
5 5 daN.m

3 H M12--30
5 daN.m

12--2004 L31--741EN/03
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Installing the capacitors

Process Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) using the
screws (8) and (9).

NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitor
support (4) side.

x 2
9

x 2 H M12--25
9 5 daN.m
1

1
H M12--25
5 daN.m

x 2 4
8

4 10 10
H M12--45
5 daN.m

12--2004 L31--741EN/03
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing stress--shields on the interrupting chambers

Presentation

Diagram

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Preparing the stress--shields 2
Installing the stress--shields 3

12--2004 L31--750EN/04
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Installing stress--shields on the interrupting chambers

Preparing the stress--shields

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Stress--shields ring 2

(2) Bracket 8

Screws
(3) 8
H M10-30

Necessary product MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

Assembling Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do not
tighten.

x 4
H M10--30

12--2004 L31--750EN/04
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Installing stress--shields on the interrupting chambers

Installing stress-- shields

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

Screws
(5) 8
H M12-30

Necessary product LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)

Process Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4)
using the screws (5).

NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with “LOCTITE 262”.

1
4

x 4

5
H M12--30
5 daN.m

12--2004 L31--750EN/04
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Installing stress--shields on the interrupting chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

12--2004 L31--750EN/04
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

Presentation

Necessary tools List of the necessary AREVA tools for the lifting and positionning of the pole :

Mark Diagram Designation Number

LIFTING STRAP
(1) 4
(3 m -- 1000 kg)

LIFTING STRAP
(2) 4
(6 m-- 1000 kg)

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Positioning the lifting straps 2
Lifting the pole 3
Positioning the pole 4

04--2007 L31--766EN/04
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

Positioning the lifting straps

Process The table below gives the steps of positioning the lifting straps :
Step Action
1 D For poles of circuit--breakers fitted with a column made up with
three insulators, four 6 m lifting straps are sufficient.
D For columns made up with four insulators, prepare four wholes :
one 3 m lifting strap (1) knotted with one 6 m lifting strap (2).
2 Pass the lifting straps like the picture below.
-- The lifting straps “a” pass over the housing (7).
-- The lifting straps “b” pass under the housing (7).
3 Cross the lifting straps “a” and “b” and place them onto the frame
using the four lifting shackles (8).

8
b
a

7 b

a
1
2
8

04--2007 L31--766EN/04
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

Lifting the pole

Process By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on the
base of the frame.
Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legs of the chassis frame (9) to ensure
guidance of the pole at the time of lifting.
Lift the pole with precaution.

10

04--2007 L31--766EN/04
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

Positioning the pole

Process The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole :

Step Action
1 Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its ground
attachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting the orienta-
tion of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.

2 If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so that the
upper plate is level.
3 Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground using nut.
4 Remove the lifting straps.
5 Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.
18 daN.m

6 Tighten the fixings on the two floor seatings in accordance with the
module entitled ’Tightening Torques’ and in accordance with the
diameters of the anchoring points.

12

04--2007 L31--766EN/04
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Presentation

Diagram

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Components, products and accessories 2
Preparing the connection 3
Installing the connection 5

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 1/8
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Components, products and accessories

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Terminal 2

(4) Connection flange 2

(5) Connection 2

(6) Flange 2

(7) Stud 2

(8) Connection tube 1

Washer
(9) 2
M20

Nut
(10) 2
H M20

Screws
(11) 8
CHc M16--55

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 2/8
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Components, products and accessories, continued

Necessary products List of the AREVA products and accessories necessary for the installing :
and accessories

AREVA
Diagram Designation
reference

--01861262 Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835106 Vaseline 204--9

--01835118 Contactal grease

--01831320 Abrasive paper A400

--02212337 Scotch Brite A--VF

--02212334 Rag

--02211842 Round brush No.4

--02211831 Brush No.16

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 3/8
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Preparing the connection

Preparing the The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease.
contact grease CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease

Preparing the The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :
contact surfaces

Step Action Diagram

1 Dry rub with fine emery


cloth.

2 Eliminate the dust pro-


duced.

x2
3 Coat with CONTACT
GREASE.

x2
4 Wipe with a clean rag, leav-
ing just a thin layer of
grease.

5 Rub over the grease with x2


waterproof abrasive paper
A400.

Continued on next page.

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 4/8
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Preparing the connection, continued

Assembling the The table below gives the steps of assembling the connection :
connection

Step Action Diagram


1 Fasten the connexion flanges
(4) to the terminals (1) using 4
screws (11).

x4
11
1
CHc M16--55
x2 13,5 daN.m

2 Screw and tighten the studs (7)


on the flanges (6) using a
screwdriver.

3 Put the connections (5) on the


connection tube (8).
8

5
5

Continued on next page.

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 5/8
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Preparing the connection, continued

Assembling the The table below gives the steps of assembling the connection :
connection, continued

Step Action Diagram


4 Put the connection (5) on the
connection flange (4) and fas-
ten the whole with the flange 6
(6), washer (9) and nut (10).
NOTE : Do not tighten the
nut (10). 5

4
9

10

5 Repeat the operation for the


second connection (5).
5

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 6/8
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Installing the connection

Preparing the The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :
contact surfaces

Step Action Diagram


Remove the temporary screws
1 from the terminal pads X1 and
X2.
2 Dry rub with fine emery cloth.

3 Eliminate the dust produced.

X1 X2
4 Coat with CONTACT
GREASE.

5 Wipe with a clean rag, leaving


just a thin layer of grease.

6 Rub over the grease with wa-


terproof abrasive paper A400.

Continued on next page.

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 7/8
Installation
Installing electric connection
with preparation of contact surfaces

Installing the connection, continued

Fastening the The table below gives the steps of fastening the connection :
connection

Step Action
1 Sling the connection with the aid of one flexible lifting strap (12).
2 Insert the connection between the interrupting chambers (2). Move
the terminal (1) inside to make the operation easier.
3 Fasten the first terminal to the interrupting chamber using screws (3);
use CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.
4 Move the terminal (1) to the other interrupting chamber and fasten it
using screws (3); use CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.
5 Tighten -- to recommended torques -- the nuts (10) of the connection
flange (4).
6 Make sure that there is no contact between stress--shields (13)
and connection. Correct -- if necessary -- by acting on the fixa-
tion of the stress--shields (13).

12 13
1

x 4
3

2 2
H M12--45
5 daN.m

4
= =

23 daN.m
1

10
x 4
3

H M12--45
5 daN.m

08--2004 L31--770EN/02
E AREVA 8/8
Installation
Installing the operating device

Presentation

Necessary product Grease MOBILPLEX 47 or MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing)

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA tools necessary for the installing :
tools
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Lifting strap 1

(6) Lever 1

Lifting equipment Provide an appropriate lifting equipment (300 daN).

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device on the
pole--support :

Step Topic Page


A Preparing the operating device 2
B Preparing the pole operating shaft 3
C Coupling the operating device 5
D Fastening the operating device 7
E 9
Removing the blocking tool

F Low voltage electrical wiring 10


G Permanent heating system 11

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 1/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Preparing the operating device

Unpacking Remove packaging protection and check that operating device and pole
reference numbers are the right ones.

Optical signalizations Check the position of operating device optical signalization :

Closing spring
Circuit--breaker Released
Open

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the operation :


components
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(11) Seal 1

(22) Spacer 4

Installing the -- Install the spacers (22) on the screws (9) outside the operating device.
necessary
components -- Install the seal (11) on the operating shaft (13).
-- Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the operating shaft
(13).

13

11

22
x4
9

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 2/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft

Introduction The pole is equipped -- for transport purposes -- with a blocking tool (4) and
a safety sheet metal (5) fixed temporarily at the end of the sleeve (12).
To realize the installing of the operating mechanism, it is necessary to :
a -- remove the blocking tool (4) and the safety sheet metal (5)
b -- proceed to manual opening the pole
c -- install the blocking tool (4) (”open” position)

4
12

Grease Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the pole operating shaft.

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 3/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft, continued

“Manual opening” The table below gives the steps of “manual opening” operation :
operation

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the blocking tool
(4) and the safety sheet
metal (5) then screw the 5
lever (6) on the flange of the
sleeve (12).

12

2 With the help of the lever (6), 6


effect a 60° rotation of the
12
sleeve (12).

3 Put back the blocking tool


(4) on the flange of the M10
sleeve (12).
NOTE : This tool ensure
the angular positioning of 4
pole operating shaft
during the coupling with
the operating mechanism.
6

4 Remove the lever (6).

12 4

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 4/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Coupling the operating device

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the operation :


components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

Washer
(10) 4
M20

(22) Spacer 1

(26) Spacer 1

(23) Eccentric spacer 2

Nut
(14) 4
H M20

(24) Wedge (thickness 1 mm) 1

(25) Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm) 2

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 5/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Coupling the operating device, continued

Coupling The table below gives the steps of the operating device coupling :

Step Action
1 Sling the operating device using a lifting strap (1) like diagram.
NOTE : Do not remove the roof (17) of the operating device
before slinging.
2 Lift the operating device and make this level.
Approximate weight 300 kg.
3 Approach the operating device in assembly position, the jib of the
lifting equipment must be under the stress--shields ring (to avoid that
the cables touch the stress--shields ring).

The final approach must be done with extreme caution.

4 Introduce the operating mechanism shaft (13) into the cylinder (12)
of the pole operating shaft (7).
5 As soon as the lower fastening screw (9) “A” emerge from the hole
of the operating mechanism support (8), install the spacer (26),
washer (10) and the nut (14).
NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14).

26
14

9
10
8

12
1
17

”A”
13

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 6/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Fastening the operating device

Installing The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device fastening
the fastening nuts nuts :

Step Action
1 Install the spacer (22), washer (10) and the nut (14) on the lower
fastening screw “B”.
NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14).
2 Install the eccentric spacers (23), washers (10) and the nuts (14) on
the upper fastening screws “C” and “D”.
NOTE : Do not tighten the nuts (14).
3 Rotate the eccentric spacers (23) to do the contact with the lower
edge of the pole--support oblong holes.
4 Tighten -- temporarily at the indicated tightening torque -- the
fastening screws (9).

23

10 5 daN.m

14
23

x 2
”C”
”D” 9

”B”

14

10
22
x1

Continued on next page.


03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 7/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Fastening the operating device, continued

Wedging The table below gives the wedging procedure for the fastening screws
and tightening depending to the X play :

X
24
22 25

Important
20
35 daN.m
If the X play is ... Action
Tighten to the indicated tightening
X <1 mm
torque.
D Wedge between the spacer (22)
and the operating device (20) with the
X ≥1 mm provided wedges (24)--(25).
D Tighten the screw to the
indicated tightening torque.

Lifting strap Remove the lifting strap.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 8/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Removing the blocking tool

Process REMOVE THE BLOCKING TOOL (4).

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 9/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Low voltage electrical wiring

Process Connect up the operating device’s wires refer to the wiring diagram of the
circuit--breaker.
Connect up the operating device’s wires.
NOTE : Use the holes provided on the supports of the frame to fix
the cables.

Connecting up the Connect the wires from the electrical contact SF6 densimeter (18) cable (19)
contact densimeter to the operating mechanism terminal block, in accordance with the relative
cable diagram.

18

19

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 10/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Permanent heating system

Process Switch on the permanent heating system of the operating device (in both
summer and winter) to avoid condensation, and the corrosion which might
result from this.

DO NOT SUPPLY THE OPERATING MECHANISM MOTOR WITH


CURRENT TO AVOID THE CLOSING SPRING BEING RELOADED.
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6
PRESSURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE
INSULATION pme.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 11/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 12/12
Installation
Fitting the SF6 filler unit
with its pipe work

Presentation

Introduction Each circuit breaker pole is fitted with an SF6 filler and test unit, which is
used to monitor the SF6 gas. To fit the unit and its pipe work, follow the
procedure explained below :

In this module This module covers the following subjects:

Subject Page
Fitting the filler unit to the chassis 2
Fitting the SF6 pipe work to the pole’s casing 3
Fixing the pipe work 4
Connecting the densimeter cable 5

03--2008 L31--982EN/01
E AREVA 1/6
Installation
Fitting the SF6 filler unit
with its pipe work

Fitting the filler unit to the chassis

Procedure The following table gives the various stages to be followed when fitting to the
filler unit to the chassis :

1 Fix the filler unit’s mounting


plate on to the feet of the frame x4
31
with the fasteners (31).

H M16--45

2 Attach the filler unit (1) to the 2 1


strengthening plate (2) on the
chassis using the appropriate
fixings (3).

x 2
3
H M12--30
5 daN.m

3 Attach the sun shield (20) using


the appropriate fixings (21). 20

x 3
21

H M12--30
5 daN.m

03--2008 L31--982EN/01
E AREVA 2/6
Installation
Fitting the SF6 filler unit
with its pipe work

Fitting the SF6 pipe work to the pole's casing

Preparation The following table lists the various preparatory steps to be followed when
fitting the SF6 pipe work to the pole’s casing :

Step Action Comments / Illustration


1 Remove the valve cover (11)
on the base of the casing at
the base of the pole as well
as the washer (12).
x 3
Carefully clean the SF6 pipe
flange before fitting. 13
12
11
H M6--20

2 Remove the plug (14). 14


After having carefully cleaned
the flange (17), fit two new x 3
seals (15 & 16) whilst refer- 15
ring to ’Preparation and fit- 16 13
ting of static seals’.

See module ’General assem- H M6--20


bly procedures’.
17

Connecting the After having checked for the presence of the two new seals (15 and 16),
SF6 pipe work attach the SF6 pipe end piece (17) using the fixings (13).

x 3
16 13
17 15
H M6--20
0,7 daN.m

03--2008 L31--982EN/01
E AREVA 3/6
Installation
Fitting the SF6 filler unit
with its pipe work

Attaching the pipe work

Procedure Attach the pipe work (27) using collars (23), bolts (24), washers (25) and nuts
(26).

x 10 H M6--30
0,7 daN.m
26
25
24

25

23
27

03--2008 L31--982EN/01
E AREVA 4/6
Installation
Fitting the SF6 filler unit
with its pipe work

Connecting the densimeter cable

Procedure Connect the wires (29) from the SF6 densimeter cable (30) to the terminal on
the actuating device as shown on the contract--specific diagrams .

30

29

03--2008 L31--982EN/01
E AREVA 5/6
Installation
Fitting the SF6 filler unit
with its pipe work
This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 L31--982EN/01
E AREVA 6/6
Installation
Connection the vacuum pump

Presentation

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA tools necessary for the installing :
tools

Mark Diagram Designation Number


VACUUM PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
(1) 110/220 V 50 Hz (4.5 m3/h) 1
or
115/230 V 60 Hz (4.5 m3/h)

UNIVERSAL CONNECTION
(2) 1
1/2” GAZ ET 1/2” NPT

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Installing the universal connection 2
Connection the tube of the customer supply vacuum pump 3
Connection the AREVA supply vacuum pump 4

03--2008 L31--858EN/01
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Connection the vacuum pump

Installing the universal connection

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the universal connection :

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the plug (3).

3
2 Install the universal
connection (2)) (hand
tightening of nut is sufficient).

03--2008 L31--858EN/01
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Connection the vacuum pump

Connection the tube of the customer supply vacuum pump

Operation on the Close the tap of the vacuum pump.


vacuum pump

Universal connection List of the universal connection components :


components
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(5) “DILO” union 1

(6) 1/2” GAS union 1

1/2” NPT union


(7) NOTE : Minimum inside 1
diameter of the tube to use
Ø 16.25mm.

(8) Collar 1

Connection The table below gives the connection procedure of the vacuum depending of
the used tube union :

If the tube is equipped


Action
with an union ...
Remove the universal connection (2) and
“DILO”
connect directly the tube.
Remove the parts (6) -- (7) of the universal
1/2” GAS connection (2) and connect the tube onto
the part (5).
Remove the part (7) of the universal
1/2” NPT connection (2) and connect the tube onto
the part (6).
No union Connect the tube directly onto the part (7)
(to avoid, not very reliable) of the universal connection (2) using collar
(8).

03--2008 L31--858EN/01
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Connection the vacuum pump

Connection the AREVA supply vacuum pump

Vacuum pump The table below describes the accessory (9) main components of the
equipment vacuum pump (1) :

SUCKING UP
PNEUROP DN25
11
14 SUCKING BACK
DN25
12 1
9
CLOSED

10

13

Mark Component Information


Opening -- Closing of the vacuum
(10) Tap
pump.
(11) Pressure gauge Reading the pressure.
(12) Distribution block Connection the vacuum pump.
(13) Close tap Fastening the accessory (9).

Process The table below gives the steps of the vacuum pump connection :

Step Action Comment


1 Install the accessory (9) on the Use the close tap (13).
“SUCKING UP” exit of the vacuum
pump (1).
2 Close the tap (10).
3 Connect one end of the tube (14) The tube (14) is not provided by
to the distribution block (12). AREVA.
4 Connect the other end of the tube Refer to “Connection the tube
(14) to the SF6 checking block. of the customer supply vacuum
pump

03--2008 L31--858EN/01
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing and commissioning
the synchronous device RPH2

Presentation

Introduction The synchronous device RPH2 is delivered with the C.B. and is to be installed
in the relay room. Delivering the RPH2 with a C.B. includes :
D The RPH2 itself,
D The programming and the testing of the RPH2 device in association with
the C.B., in accordance with the programming document and the checking
document delivered with the C.B.,
D If necessary, a temperature sensor is supplied (in accordance with the pro-
gramming document).
The RPH2 installation in the relay room to be made by people in charge of
installing the protection and control equipment in the substation.
The RPH2 installation instructions to people in charge of installing the protec-
tion and control equipment in the substation are detailed below.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Installing the RPH2 2
Installation at site of the RPH2 associated with a C.B. 3
Programming document and checking document delivered 4
with the C.B.
Adding a RPH2 device on an existing C.B. 5
Replacing a RPH2 device 6

07--2004 L31--871EN/01
E AREVA 1/6
Installation
Installing and commissioning
the synchronous device RPH2

Installing the RPH2

Installing the RPH2 The RPH2 device must be installed in the relay room. Cables must be wired :
device in the relay D between the circuit breaker and the RPH2 device,
room
D between the High Voltage Transformer (and Current Transformer if appli-
cable) and the RPH2 device.

Installing the ambient In some application, a temperature sensor to measure the ambient tempera-
temperature sensor ture is needed to be connected to the RPH2 device, and to correct the varia-
(option) tion of the C.B. operating times.
When this temperature sensor is needed, it is delivered with the RPH2 device.
This temperature sensor must be fitted at site, near the relay room, to mea-
sure the site ambient temperature.
The temperature sensor must be connected to the RPH2 device using a cable
(twisted pair).

Correspondence The reference voltage is to be measured upstream the C.B. to synchronize.


between C.B. poles
and the network The synchronous device RPH2 delivers operating impulses to each circuit
phases and the phase breaker pole, taking into consideration the voltage phase angle of the net-
measuring the work.
reference voltage Consequently, to obtain the correct synchronization of the circuit breaker op-
eration, it is necessary to respect the order of the C.B. pole 1, 2 and 3 in accor-
dance with the direct order of the network phases.

In addition the correct operation of the synchronous device RPH2 needs that
the reference voltage is measured respecting the previous phase in the C.B.
low voltage diagram.

See the module “Correspondence between C.B. poles and the network
phases and the phase measuring the reference voltage”.

Correspondence Each synchronous device RPH2 is programmed in association with a


between the RPH2, particular C.B., and for a previous application.
the C.B., and the
previous application When the correspondence RPH2 / C.B. must be changed, or when installing
a spare part RPH2, a new programming of the RPH2 device is necessary in
accordance with the programming document delivered with the C.B.

In addition, when the application (type of operation, type of charge) is


changed and is different of the programming document delivered with the
C.B., contact the after-sale service to change the programming document
and eventually the C.B. low voltage diagram.

07--2004 L31--871EN/01
E AREVA 2/6
Installation
Installing and commissioning
the synchronous device RPH2

Installation at site of the RPH2 associated with a C.B.

Process The RPH2 device is programmed in factory and tested with the associated
C.B. during the factory tests.

After installing the RPH2 , people in charge of installing the protection and
control equipment in the substation commission the RPH2 with the associat-
ed C.B. They can check the correct operation of the assembly RPH2 + C.B.
using a time recorder tool (type Hathaway CTB400) and referring with the pro-
gramming document and the checking document delivered with the C.B.

07--2004 L31--871EN/01
E AREVA 3/6
Installation
Installing and commissioning
the synchronous device RPH2

Programming document and checking document delivered with the C.B.

Introduction The RPH2 device is delivered with the C.B., and programmed and check
with its associated C.B.

Programming Programming the RPH2 consists to enter in the RPH2 internal memory all the
document parameters in relation with the application and also with the type of the associ-
ated C.B. (see the RPH2 service manual 58.020.034). All these parameters
are noted on the document called “Programming document” delivered with
the C.B.

Checking document Once programmed, the RPH2 is factory checked with the associated C.B. to
test the correct operation of this assembly. This checking tests that the se-
quence of operating times is in accordance with the previous application. The
sequence of these operating times is written in a document called “Checking
document” delivered with the C.B.

07--2004 L31--871EN/01
E AREVA 4/6
Installation
Installing and commissioning
the synchronous device RPH2

Adding a RPH2 device on an existing C.B.

Process Contact the after--sale service in order to check if the C.B. is capable of syn-
chronous operation.

Also using the RPH2 device needs to modify the C.B. low voltage diagram :
D The operation impulses needs to cross the RPH2 device,
D Depending on option and application, some information delivered by the
C.B. needs to be wired to the RPH2 device.

07--2004 L31--871EN/01
E AREVA 5/6
Installation
Installing and commissioning
the synchronous device RPH2

Replacing a RPH2 device

Type of RPH2 The RPH2 device must be the same type of the replaced one.

Programming The RPH2 device must be programmed in accordance with the programming
document associated with the C.B. (see the RPH2 service manual
58.020.034). All these parameters are noted on the document called “Pro-
gramming document” delivered with the C.B.

Checking Check tests that the sequence of operating times is in accordance with the
previous application. The sequence of these operating times is written in a
document called “Checking document” delivered with the C.B.

07--2004 L31--871EN/01
E AREVA 6/6
Installation
RPH2--Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the net-
work phases and reference voltage measurement phase

Presentation

Introduction The electrical diagram supplied with the circuit breaker illustrates the connec-
tions between the RPH2 and the circuit breaker poles, making the assumption
that :
-- The reference voltage is measured on phase 1.
-- Circuit breaker pole 1 is installed on phase 1 of the network.
-- Circuit breaker pole 2 is installed on phase 2 of the network (phase lag of
120° relative to phase 1 of the network).
-- Circuit breaker pole 3 is installed on phase 3 of the network (phase lag of
240° relative to phase 1 of the network).

If these conditions cannot be respected, it is necessary to change over


the wiring between the RPH2 and the circuit breaker and the parameter--
setting of the times in the RPH2, as per the table below :

Case to treat Action Page


Changeover of the impulse circuits
corresponding to channel 1 of the
RPH2
2
In all cases Changeover of the operating times
and offset times of the auxiliary
switches programmed in the
RPH2 for channel 1
Changeover of the impulse circuits
corresponding to channel 2 of the
RPH2
If the RPH2 synchronizes 3
both at opening and at closing Changeover of the operating times
and lag times of the auxiliary
switches programmed in the
RPH2 for channel 2
If the circuit breaker auxiliary Changeover of the connections of
switches are connected to the auxiliary switches 4
RPH2
If the RPH2 measures the Changeover of the current mea-
5
main current surement circuits

07--2004 L31--872EN/01
E AREVA 1/6
Installation
RPH2--Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the net-
work phases and reference voltage measurement phase

In all cases

Changeover of the Change over terminals X8 :3, X8 :4 and X8 :5 in order to have :


impulse circuits D X8 :3 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole corresponding
corresponding to to the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is measured.
channel 1 of the D X8 :4 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole corresponding
RPH2 to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured.
D X8 :5 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole corresponding
to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured.
The table below gives the changeover of the impulse circuits corre-
sponding to channel 1 :
El cuadro a continuación da la permutación de las conexiones de los
circuitos de orden canal 1 :
Reference phase Phase with 120° lag Phase with 240° lag
in relation to the in relation to the
reference phase reference phase
From RPH2 terminal X8 :3 RPH2 terminal X8 :4 RPH2 terminal X8 :5
To Impulse circuit of the Impulse circuit of the Impulse circuit of the
pole corresponding to pole corresponding to pole corresponding to
the reference phase the phase with a 120° the phase with a 240°
lag relative to the ref- lag relative to the ref-
erence phase erence phase

Changeover of the Change over in the RPH2 the programming of the operating times and offset
operating times and times of the channel 1 auxiliary switches :
offset times of the D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2
auxiliary switches for phase L1 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
programmed in the ing to the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is mea-
RPH2 for channel 1 sured.
D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2
for phase L2 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
ing to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured (caution: do not change over the flash and pre--flash
times)
D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2
for phase L3 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
ing to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured (caution: do not change over the flash and pre--flash
times)
The table below gives the changeover of the operating times and offset
times of the auxiliary switches programmed in the RPH2 for channel 1 :
Reference phase Phase with 120° lag Phase with 240° lag
in relation to the in relation to the
reference phase reference phase
RPH2
Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3
item
Data to Time of pole corre- Time of the phase Time of pole corre-
be input sponding to the ref- corresponding to the sponding to the
erence phase phase with 120° lag phase with 240° lag
relative to the refer- relative to the refer-
ence phase ence phase

Caution : do not change over the flash and pre--flash times.


07--2004 L31--872EN/01
E AREVA 2/6
Installation
RPH2--Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the net-
work phases and reference voltage measurement phase

If the RPH2 synchronizes both at opening and at closing

Type of RPH2 Calls for an RPH2 of type RPH2--2xx

Changeover of the Change over terminals X8 :8, X8 :9 and X8 :10 in order to have :
impulse circuits D X8 :8 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
corresponding to ing to the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is
channel 2 of the measured.
RPH2 D X8 :9 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
ing to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on which the refer-
ence voltage is measured.
D X8 :10 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole corre-
sponding to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on which the
reference voltage is measured.
The table below gives the changeover of the impulse circuits corre-
sponding to channel 2 :
Reference phase Phase with 120° lag Phase with 240° lag
in relation to the in relation to the
reference phase reference phase
From RPH2 terminal X8 :8 RPH2 terminal X8 :9 RPH2 terminal X8 :10
To Impulse circuit of the Impulse circuit of the Impulse circuit of the
pole corresponding to pole corresponding to pole corresponding to
the reference phase the phase with a 120° the phase with a 240°
lag relative to the ref- lag relative to the ref-
erence phase erence phase

Changeover of the Change over in the RPH2 the programming of the operating times and offset
operating times and times of the channel 2 auxiliary switches :
offset times of the D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2
auxiliary switches for phase L1 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
programmed in the ing to the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is mea-
RPH2 for channel 2 : sured.
D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2
for phase L2 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
ing to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured.
D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2
for phase L3 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
ing to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured.
The table below gives the changeover of the operating times and offset
times of the auxiliary switches programmed in the RPH2 for channel 2 :
Reference phase Phase with 120° lag Phase with 240° lag
in relation to the in relation to the
reference phase reference phase
RPH2
Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3
item
Data to Time of pole corre- Time of the phase Time of pole corre-
be input- sponding to the ref- corresponding to the sponding to the
Datos a erence phase phase with 120° lag phase with 240° lag
entrar relative to the refer- relative to the refer-
ence phase ence phase

Caution : do not change over the flash and pre--flash times.

07--2004 L31--872EN/01
E AREVA 3/6
Installation
RPH2--Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the net-
work phases and reference voltage measurement phase

If the circuit breaker auxiliary switches are connected to RPH2

Type of RPH2 Calls for an RPH2 with option S.

Changeover of the Change over terminals X8 :13, X8 :14 and X8 :15 in order to have :
connections of the D X8 :13 linked to the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
auxiliary switches ing to the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is mea-
sured.
D X8 :14 linked to the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
ing to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured.
D X8 :15 linked to the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker pole correspond-
ing to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured.
The table below gives the changeover of the connections of the auxilia-
ry switches :

Reference phase Phase with 120° lag Phase with 240° lag
in relation to the in relation to the
reference phase reference phase
From RPH2 terminal X8 :13 RPH2 terminal X8 :14 RPH2 terminal X8 :15
To Auxiliary switch of the Auxiliary switch of the Auxiliary switch of the
pole corresponding to pole corresponding to pole corresponding to
the reference phase the phase with a 120° the phase with a 240°
lag relative to the ref- lag relative to the ref-
erence phase erence phase

07--2004 L31--872EN/01
E AREVA 4/6
Installation
RPH2--Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the net-
work phases and reference voltage measurement phase

If the RPH2 measures the main current

Type of RPH2 Calls for an RPH2 with option I.

Changeover of the Change over the terminals of terminal block X9 in order to have :
current measurement D X9 :1 and X9 :2 (or X9 :3) linked to the current measurement circuit corre-
circuits sponding to the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is
measured.
D X9 :4 and X9 :5 (or X9 :6) linked to the current measurement circuit corre-
sponding to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the reference phase.
D X9 :7 and X9 :8 (or X9 :9) linked to the current measurement circuit corre-
sponding to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on which the ref-
erence voltage is measured.
The table below gives the changeover of the current measurement cir-
cuits :

Reference phase Phase with 120° lag Phase with 240° lag
in relation to the in relation to the
reference phase reference phase
From RPH2 terminals RPH2 terminals RPH2 terminals
X9 :1 and X9 :2 X9 :4 and X9 :5 X9 :7 and X9 :8
(or X9 :3) (or X9 :6) (or X9 :9)
To Current measure- Current measure- Current measure-
ment circuit corre- ment circuit corre- ment circuit corre-
sponding to the refer- sponding to the phase sponding to the phase
ence phase with a 120° lag rela- with a 240° lag rela-
tive to the reference tive to the reference
phase phase

07--2004 L31--872EN/01
E AREVA 5/6
Installation
RPH2--Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the net-
work phases and reference voltage measurement phase
This page is intentionally blank.

07--2004 L31--872EN/01
E AREVA 6/6
Installation
Vacuum operation

Presentation

Principle The procedure of the vacuum operation depends on the duration of


chambers/column coupling.

Decision table The table below gives the vacuum operation procedure depending on the
duration of chambers/column coupling :

If the duration of the


Action Page
chambers/column coupling is ...
≤ 40 min Simple vacuum operation 2
Vacuum operation with
> 40 min 3
nitrogen purging (N2)

03--2008 L31--886EN01
E AREVA 1/6
Installation
Vacuum operation

Simple vacuum operation

Process The table below gives the steps of the simple vacuum operation :

Step Action Comment/Diagram


1 Start the vacuum pump to KEEP THE PUMP RUNNING
evacuate the pole to a value FOR AT LEAST 1 HOUR AT
≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa). THIS VALUE.
2 Close the tap (1) of the vacuum
pump.

Open

Closed
1

3 Stop the vacuum pump.


4 Disconnect the vacuum pump
tube (2).

5 Fit the filling tool (4) -- HAND


TIGHT.

END OF PROCEDURE

03--2008 L31--886EN01
E AREVA 2/6
Installation
Vacuum operation

Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2)

Preparing the The table below gives the steps of preparing the nitrogen bottle (N2) :
nitrogen bottle (N2)

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the cover (6) and plug (7)
from the nitrogen (N2) bottle (8). 7

N2
2 Fit the pressure reducer (10) on
the nitrogen (N2) bottle (8). 8

N2 10
3 Briefly open the nitrogen (N2)
bottle tap (9) and the cock (11) of 9 Open
the pressure reducer to eliminate
any air inside the piping (approx.
20 s at low flow--rate).

N2 11 Closed

4 Close the bottle tap (9) and the


cock (11) of the pressure reducer. 9 12
NOTE : Keep the end of the
tube (12) in high position to
keep the nitrogen (N2) which it
contains and to prevent damp
air from entering.

N2 11 Closed

END OF PROCEDURE

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L31--886EN01
E AREVA 3/6
Installation
Vacuum operation

Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2), continued

Vacuum operation The table below gives the steps of the vacuum operation with nitrogen purging
(N2) :

Step Action Comment/Diagram


1 Carry out a simple vacuum ≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa)
operation. during 1 hour.
2 Remove the valve cap (5) of the
filling tool (4).

5
3 S Open the nitrogen (N2) bottle
tap (9). 9 12
S Open and close the cock (11)
of the pressure reducer to
eliminate any air inside the tube Open
(12) (approx. 3 s at low
flow--rate).
S Close the nitrogen (N2) bottle
tap (9). N2 11 Closed

4 Connect the tube (12) to the filling


tool (4).

12

5 Open the nitrogen (N2) bottle tap


(9) and adjust gas output by acting 9 Open
on the cock (11) of the pressure
reducer (reduced flow rate). 13
S Close the tap (9) from time to
time to check pressure on the
gauge (13).
S Start filling again until the
required pressure about 0.03 MPa
is reached.
N2 Closed
11
S Close in this order : the tap (9),
then the cock (11).

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L31--886EN01
E AREVA 4/6
Installation
Vacuum operation

Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2), continued

Vacuum operation, The table below gives the continuation of the steps of the vacuum operation
continued with nitrogen purging (N2) :

Step Action Comment/Diagram


6 Disconnect the tube (12) from the
filling tool (4).

12
7 Remove the filling tool (4) with the
valve cap.

4
8 Connect the vacuum pump and
open the tap (1) to bring the
volume of pole back to ambient
pressure (filled with nitrogen at
0.03 MPa).

Open

Closed
1

9 Carry out a new simple vacuum ≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa)


operation. during 1 hour.
END OF PROCEDURE

03--2008 L31--886EN01
E AREVA 5/6
Installation
Vacuum operation

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 L31--886EN01
E AREVA 6/6
Installation
Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure
for using the pressure gauge (tool)

Presentation

Introduction SF6 pressure values, for the filling, must obligatorily be read on the pressure
gauge 0--1 MPa (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dial
densimeter (MPa -- psi), it is not accurate enough for the filling.

Pressure gauge 0...1 MPa

Pressure units D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa).


(reminder) 1 bar (14.503 psi) = 1,000 hPa
1 bar = 100 kPa
10 bar = 1 MPa

Symbols IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics.

Symbol Designation
pre Filling rated pressure for the insulation
pae Alarm pressure for the insulation
pme Minimal pressure for the insulation

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Example of the filling pressure calculation 2
Calculation of the filling pressure at site 3
Values of the SF6 gas pressures in accordance 4
with the temperature

06--2004 L31--901EN/03
E AREVA 1/6
Installation
Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure
for using the pressure gauge (tool)

Example of the filling pressure calculation

Example Determination of the circuit--breaker’s filling pressure with SF6 gas.

Parameters Values
pre
0,65 MPa
SF6 gas rated filling effective
(94.3 psi)
pressure for the insulation
Ambient temperature 5°C
Local atmospheric pressure 93,2 kPa

SF6 gas filling The table below gives the calculation steps of the pure SF6 filling pressure :

Step Action Result


1 In the chart (page 5) “Values of the
SF6 gas effective pressures in ac-
cordance with the temperature”, 0,603 MPa
read the pre value on the
t°C = 5 row.
2 Calculate the difference of the at-
mospheric pressure : 0,0081 MPa
0.1013 -- 0.0932
3 Calculate the rated effective pres-
sure pre : 0,6111 MPa
0.603 + 0.0081
4 Filling is carried out to the calcu-
Pure SF6 gas filling pressure
lated pressure, plus 0,01 MPa,
0,6211 MPa
that is to say : 0.6111 + 0.01

06--2004 L31--901EN/03
E AREVA 2/6
Installation
Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure
for using the pressure gauge (tool)

Calculation of the filling pressure at site

Measurement Write down the result measurement into the corresponding box :

Measure the atmospheric pressure in MPa. A ,

Measure the ambient temperature in °C. B

Calculation of the Transfer the values into the corresponding box and write down the result :
pure SF6 gas filling
pressure

With the help of the table (page 5) “Values of the SF6 gas pre
effective pressures in accordance with the temperature”,
determine the value “pre“ in accordance with
the ambient temperature (B) " C ,
Value of the reference atmospheric pressure in MPa D 0 , 1 0 1
Transfer the value of the local atmospheric pressure
(A) " A - ,
Calculate the difference of the atmospheric pressure
(D -- A) " E ,
Transfer the value (C) "
C+ ,
Calculate the rated effective pressure
(E + C) " F ,
The filling with SF6 gas is carried out
to the calculated pressure, plus 0.01 MPa, + 0 , 0 1

(F + 0.01) " G ,

06--2004 L31--901EN/03
E AREVA 3/6
Installation
Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure
for using the pressure gauge (tool)

Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature

Rated effective pres- Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures (MPa) corrected in accordance with
sure 0.75 MPa temperature for an atmospheric pressure of 101.3 kPa :
t_C pre pae pme t_C pre pae pme
--25 0,584 0,500 0,477 18 0,743 0,634 0,604
--24 0,588 0,503 0,480 19 0,746 0,637 0,607
--23 0,591 0,506 0,483 20 0,75 0,64 0,61
--22 0,595 0,509 0,486 21 0,754 0,643 0,613
--21 0,599 0,512 0,489 22 0,757 0,646 0,616
--20 0,602 0,516 0,492 23 0,761 0,649 0,619
--19 0,606 0,519 0,495 24 0,765 0,652 0,622
--18 0,610 0,522 0,498 25 0,768 0,656 0,625
--17 0,613 0,525 0,501 26 0,772 0,659 0,628
--16 0,617 0,528 0,504 27 0,776 0,662 0,631
--15 0,621 0,531 0,507 28 0,780 0,665 0,634
--14 0,625 0,534 0,509 29 0,783 0,668 0,637
--13 0,628 0,537 0,512 30 0,787 0,671 0,640
--12 0,632 0,540 0,515 31 0,791 0,674 0,643
--11 0,636 0,544 0,518 32 0,794 0,677 0,645
--10 0,639 0,547 0,521 33 0,798 0,680 0,648
--9 0,643 0,550 0,524 34 0,802 0,684 0,651
--8 0,647 0,553 0,527 35 0,805 0,687 0,654
--7 0,650 0,556 0,530 36 0,809 0,690 0,657
--6 0,654 0,559 0,533 37 0,813 0,693 0,660
--5 0,658 0,562 0,536 38 0,816 0,696 0,663
--4 0,661 0,565 0,539 39 0,820 0,699 0,666
--3 0,665 0,568 0,542 40 0,824 0,702 0,669
--2 0,669 0,572 0,545 41 0,827 0,705 0,672
--1 0,673 0,575 0,548 42 0,831 0,708 0,675
0 0,676 0,578 0,551 43 0,835 0,712 0,678
1 0,680 0,581 0,554 44 0,839 0,715 0,681
2 0,684 0,584 0,557 45 0,842 0,718 0,684
3 0,687 0,587 0,560 46 0,846 0,721 0,687
4 0,691 0,590 0,563 47 0,850 0,724 0,690
5 0,695 0,593 0,566 48 0,853 0,727 0,693
6 0,698 0,596 0,569 49 0,857 0,730 0,696
7 0,702 0,600 0,572 50 0,861 0,733 0,699
8 0,706 0,603 0,575 51 0,864 0,736 0,702
9 0,709 0,606 0,577 52 0,868 0,740 0,705
10 0,713 0,609 0,580 53 0,872 0,743 0,708
11 0,717 0,612 0,583 54 0,875 0,746 0,711
12 0,720 0,615 0,586 55 0,879 0,749 0,713
13 0,724 0,618 0,589 56 0,883 0,752 0,716
14 0,728 0,621 0,592 57 0,887 0,755 0,719
15 0,732 0,624 0,595 58 0,890 0,758 0,722
16 0,735 0,628 0,598 59 0,894 0,761 0,725
17 0,739 0,631 0,601 60 0,898 0,764 0,728

Continued on next page.

06--2004 L31--901EN/03
E AREVA 4/6
Installation
Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure
for using the pressure gauge (tool)

Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature,
continued

Rated effective pres- Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures (MPa) corrected in accordance with
sure 0.65 MPa temperature for an atmospheric pressure of 101.3 kPa :
t_C pre pae pme t_C pre pae pme
--30 0,492 0,409 0,387 16 0,637 0,530 0,500
--29 0,495 0,412 0,389 17 0,641 0,532 0,503
--28 0,498 0,415 0,391 18 0,644 0,535 0,505
--27 0,501 0,417 0,394 19 0,647 0,537 0,508
--26 0,505 0,420 0,396 20 0,65 0,54 0,51
--25 0,508 0,422 0,399 21 0,653 0,543 0,512
--24 0,511 0,425 0,401 22 0,656 0,545 0,515
--23 0,514 0,428 0,404 23 0,659 0,548 0,517
--22 0,517 0,430 0,406 24 0,663 0,550 0,520
--21 0,520 0,433 0,409 25 0,666 0,553 0,522
--20 0,524 0,435 0,411 26 0,669 0,556 0,525
--19 0,527 0,438 0,414 27 0,672 0,558 0,527
--18 0,530 0,441 0,416 28 0,675 0,561 0,530
--17 0,533 0,443 0,419 29 0,678 0,564 0,532
--16 0,536 0,446 0,421 30 0,682 0,566 0,535
--15 0,539 0,449 0,424 31 0,685 0,569 0,537
--14 0,543 0,451 0,426 32 0,688 0,571 0,540
--13 0,546 0,454 0,429 33 0,691 0,574 0,542
--12 0,549 0,456 0,431 34 0,694 0,577 0,545
--11 0,552 0,459 0,433 35 0,697 0,579 0,547
--10 0,555 0,462 0,436 36 0,701 0,582 0,550
--9 0,558 0,464 0,438 37 0,704 0,584 0,552
--8 0,562 0,467 0,441 38 0,707 0,587 0,554
--7 0,565 0,469 0,443 39 0,710 0,590 0,557
--6 0,568 0,472 0,446 40 0,713 0,592 0,559
--5 0,571 0,475 0,448 41 0,716 0,595 0,562
--4 0,574 0,477 0,451 42 0,720 0,597 0,564
--3 0,577 0,480 0,453 43 0,723 0,600 0,567
--2 0,580 0,483 0,456 44 0,726 0,603 0,569
--1 0,584 0,485 0,458 45 0,729 0,605 0,572
0 0,587 0,488 0,461 46 0,732 0,608 0,574
1 0,590 0,490 0,463 47 0,735 0,611 0,577
2 0,593 0,493 0,466 48 0,738 0,613 0,579
3 0,596 0,496 0,468 49 0,742 0,616 0,582
4 0,599 0,498 0,470 50 0,745 0,618 0,584
5 0,603 0,501 0,473 51 0,748 0,621 0,587
6 0,606 0,503 0,475 52 0,751 0,624 0,589
7 0,609 0,506 0,478 53 0,754 0,626 0,591
8 0,612 0,509 0,480 54 0,757 0,629 0,594
9 0,615 0,511 0,483 55 0,761 0,631 0,596
10 0,618 0,514 0,485 56 0,764 0,634 0,599
11 0,622 0,516 0,488 57 0,767 0,637 0,601
12 0,625 0,519 0,490 58 0,770 0,639 0,604
13 0,628 0,522 0,493 59 0,773 0,642 0,606
14 0,631 0,524 0,495 60 0,776 0,645 0,609
15 0,634 0,527 0,498

06--2004 L31--901EN/03
E AREVA 5/6
Installation
Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure
for using the pressure gauge (tool)
This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L31--901EN/03
E AREVA 6/6
Installation
Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Presentation

Principle The pre--filling of the pole with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa must be done after the
vacuum operation.

Necessary equipment List of the necessary AREVA equipment and tools for the pre--filling with
and tools SF6 gas :

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(4) Filling tool 1

(10) Pressure reducer 1

(8) SF6 gas bottle(s) *

* depending on the aparatus.

In this module This module contains the following topics:

Topic Page
Preparing the SF6 gas bottle 2
Pre--filling with SF6 gas 3
Tightness inspection 4

03--2008 L31--956EN/01
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Preparing the SF6 gas bottle

Process The table below gives the steps of preparing the SF6 gas bottle :

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the cover (6) and plug (7)
from the SF6 gas bottle (8). 7

SF6
2 Fit the pressure reducer (10) on
the SF6 gas bottle (8). 8

SF6 10
3 Briefly open the SF6 gas bottle tap
(9) and the cock (11) of the 9 Open
pressure reducer to eliminate any
air inside the piping (approx. 20 s
at low flow--rate).

SF6 11 Closed

4 Close the SF6 gas bottle tap (9)


and the cock (11) of the pressure 9 12
reducer.
NOTE : Keep the end of the
tube (12) in high position to
keep the SF6 gas which it
contains and to prevent damp
air from entering.
SF6 Closed
11

END OF PROCEDURE

03--2008 L31--956EN/01
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Pre-- filling with SF6 gas

Process The table below gives the steps of the pre--filling with SF6 gas operation :

Step Action Comment/Diagram


1 Remove the valve cap (5) of the
filling tool (4).

5
2 D Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9).
9 12
D Open and close the cock (11) of
the pressure reducer to eliminate
any air inside the tube (12)
(approx. 3 s at low flow--rate). Open
D Close the SF6 gas bottle tap (9).

SF6 11 Closed

3 Connect the tube (12) to the filling


tool (4).

12
4 Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9)
and adjust gas output by acting on 9 Open
the cock (11) of the pressure
reducer (reduced flow rate). 13
D Close the tap (9) from time to
time to check pressure on the
gauge (13).
D Start filling again until the
required pressure about 0.05 MPa
is reached. SF6 Closed
11
D Close in this order : the tap (9),
then the cock (11).
END OF PROCEDURE

03--2008 L31--956EN/01
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Tightness inspection

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA tools necessary for the tightness inspection :
tools

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(14) Leak detector (optional) 1

Chambers -- column The table below gives the steps of the chambers -- column tightness
coupling inspection operation :

Step Action Diagram


1 Seal the joint between the
housing (16) of the chambers
and the upper column insulator
(17) around its complete
circumference, using adhesive
tape (18).

18
16

17

2 Perforate the adhesive tape


(18) in the middle at ”X” and
check tightness using a leak
detector (14). X

18
14

03--2008 L31--956EN/01
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

Presentation

Warning DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURING


TRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE GAS FILLING
OPERATION SHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT A
MINIMUM PROTECTION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m).

Necessary equipment List of the necessary AREVA equipment and tools for the filling with SF6
and tools gas :

Mark Diagram Designation Number

2 Filling tool 1

8 Pressure reducer 1

6 SF6 gas bottle(s) *

Gauge
14 1
0...1 MPa

* depending on the apparatus.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Filling with SF6 gas 2
Confirm the pressure 3
Checking pressure 4
Checking gas--tightness 6
Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit--breaker 7

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 1/8
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

Filling with SF6 gas

Filling pressure Calculate the SF6 gas filling pressure in accordance with the temperature and
calculation the local atmospheric pressure.
Filling is carried out to calculated pressure plus 0.01 MPa.

See the module “SF6 gas monitoring” (Calculation of the filling pressure at
site).

Ambient
temperature

0°C

Process The table below gives the steps of the filling with SF6 gas operation :

11

Open

SF6
9 Closed

Step Action Comment


1 Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (7) Close the tap (7) from time to
and adjust gas output by acting on time to check pressure on the
the cock (9) of the pressure gauge (11).
reducer (reduced flow rate).

2 Start filling again until the


required pressure is reached.
3 Close in this order : the tap (7),
then the cock (9).

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 2/8
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

Confirm the pressure

Process The table below gives the confirmation operation steps of the filling pressure
with SF6 gas :

Step Action Comment/Diagram


1 Disconnect the tube (10) -- of the
pressure reducer -- from the filling
tool (2).
NOTE : Keep the unconnected 2
end of the tube (10) higher
than the other end, to stop the
10
SF6 gas which it contains from
escaping and to prevent
moisture entering.

2 S Connect the tube (15) -- of the


gauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to the filling
tool (2).
S When the required pressure is
confirmed, remove the gauge (14) 2
and and store it away from
humidity.

15

14

3 Remove the filling tool (2) and refit


the plug (17) (4 daN.m)

17

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 3/8
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

Checking pressure

Principle Having allowed the temperature to remain steady for at least 12 hours after
filling, it is necessary to check and definitively adjust the pressure to its
corrected value -- defined according to both ambient temperature and
atmospheric pressure.

Preparation The table below gives the preparation steps before checking pressure :

Step Action Diagram


1 S Remove the plug (17) and
install the filling tool (2).
S Unscrew the valve--cap (3).

3
17

2 S Connect the tube (15) -- of the


gauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to the filling
tool (2).

15

14

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 4/8
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

Checking pressure, continued

Decision table The table below gives the process depending the pressure measured :

14

16

If the pressure measured is ... Action


correct End of control
Adjust the pressure by means of valve
too high (16) on the gauge (14) to reach the
required corrected pressure.
Top--up with SF6 gas
If the pressure
adjustment Action
is ...
≤ 0.05 MPa End of control
too low > 0.05 MPa Proceed to a
new inspection
after a
stabilization
period of
2--3 hours.

End of control The table below gives the end steps of the checking pressure :
Step Action Diagram
1 Disconnect the gauge (14)
0--1 MPa.
14

2 S Remove the filling tool (2) and


re--install the plug (17), applying
a tightening torque of 4 daN.m;
leak--tightness is only guaranteed
if this condition is respected. 17
S Screw the valve--cap (3) on
the filling tool (2). 2

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 5/8
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

Checking gas-- tightness

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA tools necessary for the tightness inspection :
tools

Mark Diagram Designation Number

12 Leak detector (optional) 1

Process Make sure that the plug (17) is perfectly leak--tight using the leak detector
(12).

12
17

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 6/8
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit-- breaker

Principle This measurement is not required, the equipment being provided with
molecular sieves in sufficient quantity to give a dew point of ≤ 0°C (32°F) for
an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F), this applies for a unit filled to its
nominal pressure for 2 or 3 months.

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 7/8
Installation
Filling with SF6 gas

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 L32--017EN/01
E AREVA 8/8
Commissioning
Pre-- commissioning inspections

Presentation

Introduction After installation of the bay, completion of all earth circuit and electrical con-
nections, it is necessary to perform certain pre--commissioning inspections.
These inspections should be performed with the apparatus ready to be com-
missioned (energized), in other words
S LV electrical circuits conforming, in voltage and type, with the low--voltage
diagrams and rating plate of the apparatus.
S Envelopes at rated SF6 ou SF6+CF4 gas mixture pressure.
NOTE : Rated pressure, pressure of equipment after SF6 ou SF6+CF4
gas mixture filling.
S Flexible connections linking circuit--breaker to busbar installed.

Caution DURING OPERATIONS REQUIRED AS PART OF INSPECTION PRO-


GRAMME PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING, ALL POSSIBLE SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNEL
WORKING ON THE EQUIPMENT.

In this module This module contains the following checking inspections :

Inspections Page
Pole/operating device coupling sleeve 2
Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers 3
SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas 4
Operating device 5
Finish and test operations 6

06--2006 L34--011EN/02
E AREVA 1/6
Commissioning
Pre-- commissioning inspections

Pole/operating device coupling sleeve

Checking Check that the blocking tool is not on the flange of the sleeve. Otherwise
remove it imperatively.

06--2006 L34--011EN/02
E AREVA 2/6
Commissioning
Pre-- commissioning inspections

Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers

Inspection Check that the interruption chambers are disposed correctly, the bosses
(B1) and (B2) must be situated on the same side as the operating mecha-
nism (3).

Rule When facing bosses (B1) and (B2) :


-- chamber ”1” is on the left,
-- chamber ”2” is on the right.

Diagram
B1

B2

06--2006 L34--011EN/02
E AREVA 3/6
Commissioning
Pre-- commissioning inspections

SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas

Reminder SF6 or SF6+CF4 envelopes are at rated pressure following the SF6 or
SF6+CF4 gas filling operation.

Parameters Take note of parameters below :


S site altitude, in meters,
S atmospheric pressure of site in kPa,
S site temperature in °C.

Checking SF6 or SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure values must obligatorily be read on the pressure
SF6+CF4 gas inspection gauge (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dial
densimeter on the filling control block (where applicable) ; it is not accurate
enough for this inspection.

See the module “Calculation of the SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas filling pressure
to using the pressure gauge (tool)”.

The table below gives the steps of checking :

Step Action Comment


1 Measure SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas Follow the instructions given in
pressure by means of the pressure module ”Filling with SF6 or
inspection gauge (tooling) SF6+CF4 gas”.
2 Correct pressure found. Follow the instructions given in
module ”Calculation of the SF6
or SF6+CF4 gas filling pressure
to using the pressure gauge
(tool)”.

SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas The SF6 or SF6+CF4 humidity level need not be known as the equipment is
humidity level fitted with molecular sieves in sufficient numbers to give a dew point lower
than, or equal to, 0°C at an ambient temperature of 20°C, for an apparatus
filled to its rated pressure for 2 or 3 months.

Checking tightness Each on site assemblage of parts subjected to SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas requires
of assemblages seals. The quality of these assemblages must be checked.
under SF6 or SF6+CF4 This inspection should be undertaken once all the filling and pressure control
pressure operations are finished.

Execute this checking according to instructions given in module ”SF6 or


SF6+CF4 gas monitoring”.

06--2006 L34--011EN/02
E AREVA 4/6
Commissioning
Pre-- commissioning inspections

Operating device

Measurements Note the supply voltage of motors on the operating mechanism terminals.

Inspection Check that the following items are working correctly :


-- heating,
-- lighting (where applicable),
-- connections on terminals (no excessive tightening).

06--2006 L34--011EN/02
E AREVA 5/6
Commissioning
Pre-- commissioning inspections

Finish and test operations

Finish Check the general appearance of the apparatus and touch up paint if neces-
sary before commissioning.

Test operations S The connection of auxiliary circuits is sufficiently advanced to allow remote
controls to be used.
S Perform 5 CLOSING -- OPENING cycles electrically, by remote control.

Caution DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURING


TRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE TEST OPERATIONS
SHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT A MINIMUM PROTEC-
TION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m).

06--2006 L34--011EN/02
E AREVA 6/6
Maintenance
Maintenance plan

Presentation

Introduction GL circuit--breakers use pure SF6 gas as an arc quenching medium (or a
SF6+CF4 gas mixture) and require only a reduced amount of maintenance.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Maintenance plan 2
Maintenance operations 3
Detail of maintenance operations 4

07--2006 L51--004EN/04
E AREVA 1/6
Maintenance
Maintenance plan

Maintenance plan

Maintenance Under normal operating conditions, the maintenance plan may be defined as
frequency follows :

Type of
Frequency Comment
examination
It is advisable to perform
at least 2 CO duty cycles
per year, when apparatus
Maintenance are scarcely used, in order
Once or twice a year
visits to check that the circuit--
breaker and associated
control circuits are work-
ing properly.
This necessitates circuit--
breaker shutdown. It is not
necessary, however to dis-
Inspections Every five years
mantle interrupting cham-
bers and other sub--assem-
blies.
Perform when one of the fol- However, it is recommended
lowing criteria is reached : to proceed with inspection of
D operating life time the pole or circuit--breaker
≥ 20 years used the most, then to adapt
Overhaul
D number of mechanical the maintenance pro-
cycles ≥ 3,000 gramme for the other brea-
kers depending on the
D electric wear limit results observed.

07--2006 L51--004EN/04
E AREVA 2/6
Maintenance
Maintenance plan

Maintenance operations

Guide The table below is a guide of the operations to be carried out at each mainte-
nance stage :

MAINTENANCE VISITS (1 or 2 times a year)


INSPECTION (every 5 years)
OVERHAUL (OPERATING TIME : 20 years)
OVERHAUL (MECHANICAL OPERATIONS : 3 000 cycles)
OVERHAUL (ELECTRICAL WEAR : see “Electrical wear
limits”)

J J J J J Operation counter reading.


Overall inspection : appearance (corrosion, paintwork,
J J J
signs of overheating).
Check operation of permanent heating. Check condition
J J J J J
of air vents.
If the circuit--breaker is fitted with an SF6 dial densimeter
J J J or a pressure gauge, check SF6 pressure (or SF6+CF4
gas mixture).
It is advisable to perform at least 2 CO duty cycles per
year, when apparatus are scarcely used, in order to
J
check that circuit--breaker and associated control circuits
are working properly.
Check SF6 densimeter thresholds. Then adjust pressure
J J
to its rated value.
Check tightening of parts not subjected to pressure
J J J
(frame -- deck -- cubicle).
Check tightening of low voltage terminals (∗ 6 months
∗ J J J
after commissioning).
J J J Check relay operation.
J Change door seal, side panels seal and roof seal.
J J J J Measure operating times for poles and auxiliary contacts.
Carry out operations at recommended duties and rated
J J J J
voltage.
J J Change (or recondition) interrupting chambers.
Check that the damper piston for the opening of the
J
control presents no oil leak.

07--2006 L51--004EN/04
E AREVA 3/6
Maintenance
Maintenance plan

Detail of maintenance operations

Caution DURING MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ALL POSSIBLE SAFETY PRE-


CAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNEL WORKING
ON THE EQUIPMENT.
(Disconnect CB from HV system, remove LV supplies etc.)

General condition The apparatus should be subjected to visual inspection. If patches of corro-
of the apparatus sion are found begin reconditioning of the affected parts.
The table below gives the process respecting surface finish and protection :

Support Inspection Action


D Thorough brushing of oxidized
parts.
Galvanized
Oxidized parts D Degreasing with solvent.
steel
D Application of a coat of zinc
paint.
D Thorough degreasing with sol-
vent.
Light scratches
D Application of a coat of lacquer
Painted using a brush.
galvanized
l i d D Scouring of paint surface with
steel emery paper 400.
or
painted D Thorough degreasing with sol-
aluminium Deep scratches vent.
alloy or flaking D Application of a coat of primer,
then drying for 24 h.
D Application of a coat of polyure-
thane lacquer using a brush.

Products used :
D RUMCOAT EEVA primer by DERIVERY ref. 333103.
D Polyurethane lacquer 780 by DERIVERY, ref. depending on color of equip-
ment.

Continued on next page.

07--2006 L51--004EN/04
E AREVA 4/6
Maintenance
Maintenance plan

Detail of maintenance operations, continued

SF6 pressure gas For a circuit--breaker equipped with a ”dial--type” SF6 gas densimeter, check
the position of the needle.

Needle position Colored area Direction

GREEN None

Perform a topping--up
YELLOW
operation.

Abnormally low density,


find the origin of the
leak and contact
RED AREVA T&D S.A.
After--sales Service.

NOTE : If the intersection is in either the yellow or red zone, without


any particular indication from the electrical contact densimeter, verify
the concordance of different information sources to find the defective
element and then replace it.

Operating device Air--vents should be clean, free of dust and unobstructed. If necessary clean
using a solvent.
Make sure that the permanent resistors are working properly by checking that
these give off heat and that there are no overheating marks (a zone notorious
for this).
For thermally controlled resistors, check that energizing and de--energizing
takes place correctly at voltage supply terminals by means of a thermostat
(recommended thermostat temperature : +5°C).
If necessary, change resistors found to be defective.
For the opening damper, if any leak is observed, please contact
AREVA T&D S.A., After--Sales Department, to proceed with any changes.

Operation counter Read indications given by the counter(s) and note these on the inspection
sheet ”Maintenance visits”.
The number of circuit--breaker operations recorded influences future mainte-
nance operations.

Continued on next page.

07--2006 L51--004EN/04
E AREVA 5/6
Maintenance
Maintenance plan

Detail of maintenance operations, continued

Electrical densimeter Check the electrical contact SF6 densimeter thresholds.


thresholds If the values found are outside required tolerances replace the densimeter.

Tightening of Check and adjust, with a torque wrench, the tightening torques of screws on
mountings sub--assemblies not subjected to gas pressure. The tightening torques are
given in paragraph ”Tightening torques”.

Relay operation Check relay operation by executing the following circuit--breaker sequences :
-- closing lock--out,
-- automatic opening (where applicable),
-- anti--pumping.

Tightening With the electric cubicle out of service, check that the connectors and tips of
LV terminals conductors are tightened correctly and check the torque of connection mount-
ings.
Tool used : 4 mm diameter screw driver , for terminals of the ”Entrelec” type
(for example).

CAUTION : SCREWS ON TERMINALS MUST NOT BE OVER--TIGHT-


ENED.

Insulating envelopes Check the condition of insulating envelopes, these should be free from impact
marks, splintering, cracks, dust deposits, pollution etc...
If necessary, clean these using a dry rag.
If anomalies are found contact :
AREVA T&D SA, After--sales Service in order to change the defective parts.

Interrupting Check the condition of interrupting chambers. This operation necessitates


chambers complete dismantling of the interrupting chamber to gain access to the ele-
ments to be inspected and should obligatorily be performed by AREVA T&D
SA, After--sales Service -- to be contacted before all operations of this kind,
preferably at the maintenance planning stage.

07--2006 L51--004EN/04
E AREVA 6/6
Maintenance
Electrical wear limits

Electrical wear limits

Estimation Electrical wear can be determined by means of the curve below. This
curve corresponds with the formula :

ΣNI2 = 20,000 kA2 (*)


N = number of interruptions on value I.

Example : it is possible to perform 50 interruptions on a current of 20 kA.

(*) Normal guarantee. In certain special operation conditions, other values


may be guaranteed.

I (kA)
Diagram

50

20

10

10 20 30 50 100 500 1000 3000

Number of interruptions

06--2004 L51--052EN/03
E AREVA 1/2
Maintenance
Electrical wear limits

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L51--052EN/03
E AREVA 2/2
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

Presentation

Necessary tools List of AREVA tools necessary for the operation :

Item Illustration Designation Reference Quantity


VL--02842117P
Pressure gauge
+
0...0,765 MPa
V0005499001P
(11) 1
VL--02842118P
Pressure gauge
+
0...1 MPa
V0005499001P
VL--02557208P
Reducing valve
+
0...0,765 MPa
VLN55161601P
(17) 1
VL--02557392P
Reducing valve
+
0...1 MPa
VLN55161601P

Set of seals V0000270121P 1

Signal lamp VL--02861501P 1

In this module This module covers the following subjects:


Subject Page
Preparation of the filler unit 2
Connection of the densimeter 3
Checking densimeter thresholds 4
Returning the filler unit to service 6
Storage of the checking tools 7

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 1/8
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

Preparation of the filler unit

Introduction The densimeter is remotely installed on the chassis. It is linked to the


circuit--breaker’s volume of SF6 (or SF6+CF4).
To check the contact densimeter’s thresholds, it is mandatory to isolate the
densimeter’s volume from the pole’s volume of SF6 (of SF6+CF4) gas.

Procedure The following table defines the procedure for preparing the densimeter :
Step Action Illustration
1 Remove the fixings (8) and
the valve cover (2) then
remove the seals (16). 16

x4
8
H M6--20
2 Remove the valve (5) cap
(4).
5
4

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 2/8
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

Connection of the densimeter

Procedure The following table defines the procedure for connecting the densimeter to
the test tool :

Step Action Illustration


1 Check the pressure gau-
ge’s (11) ”REGULATION” 11
(20) screw is in the ”check
valve closed” position
(screwed down).
20

2 Connect the pipe (12) bet-


ween the pressure gauge
(11) and the filling unit’s
valve (5).

12

3 Open the tap (21) on the


SF6 gas bottle for a brief 11
instant, and the reducing
valve (22) to expel the air
contained in the pipe (23)
(20 s approx. at a low rate
of flow). 10
Connect the pipe (23) to 21
the pressure gauge’s (10)
valve (11).
23

22
SF6

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 3/8
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

Checking densimeter thresholds

Adjusting the pres- The following table defines the steps for adjusting SF6 pressure in the
sure of the SF6 gas connection valve unit (5) :
Step Action Remark
1 Open the tap (21) on the SF6
cylinder and adjust the gas outlet
using the reducing valve (22 (low
rate of flow). See the ”Calculating the SF6
From time to time, close the tap gas filling pressure for use
(21) to read the pressure on the of the pressure gauge
pressure gauge (11). (tools)” module.
2 Resume filling until the desired
pressure is reached.
3 Close the tap (21) and the valve
(22) in that order.

21

11
Open

SF6 Closed
22

Continued on next page.

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 4/8
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

Checking densimeter thresholds, continued

Check The following table defines the steps for checking the densimeter :

Step Action Remark


1 Connect a signal lamp to the Connection of the operating
densimeter’s ”Alarm pressure mechanism to the terminal block,
for isolation” contact pae. according to the electric diagram.
2 Calculate the effective pres- Value pae : see technical characte-
sure for switchover of the ristics.
”Alarm pressure for isola-
tion” contact pae, corrected See ”Calculating the SF6 gas
according to local atmosphe- filling pressure for use of the
ric pressure and temperature. pressure gauge (tools)” module.
3 D Create a leak by unscre-
wing the pressure gauge’s
(20) ”REGULATION” screw
(11), and check the contact
switches over at the pre-
viously calculated value.
D Proceed in the same way 11
to check the ”Minimum pres-
sure for isolation” contact pme.

20

In a case where one of the thre-


sholds does not comply with the
specified value, replace the densi-
meter.

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 5/8
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

Returning the filler unit to service

Procedure The following table defines the procedure for re--installing the filler unit :
Step Action Illustration
1 Disconnect pipe (12) from
the block’s valve (5).
Screw the cap (4) onto the 4 5
valve (5).

12

2 After having changed the


seals (16), refit the valve
cover (2) using the fixings
16
(8).

x4
8
H M6--20
0,7 daN.m

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 6/8
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

Storage of the checking tools

Procedure The following table defines the steps for storing the checking tools :
Step Action Illustration
1 Disconnect the pipe (23),
between theSF6 gass bot- 11
tle and the valve (10) on
the pressure gauge (11).

10

23
SF6

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 7/8
Maintenance
Control of contact densimeter thresholds

This page is intentionally blank.

02--2008 L51--113EN/01
E AREVA 8/8
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Presentation

Warning BEFORE ALL INTERVENTION ON THE OPERATING DEVICE, MAKE


SURE THAT THE CIRCUIT--BREAKER IS OPEN AND ITS POSITION INDI-
CATOR IS IN THE POSITION BELOW.

Circuit--breaker Closing spring


Open Released

NEVER WORK THE OPERATING DEVICE WHEN THIS IS NOT COUPLED


TO THE CIRCUIT--BREAKER.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Positions of optical signalization 2
Safety measures 3
Preparing the operating device 4
Replacing an opening or closing electro--magnet 5
Resumption of service 6
Lubrication 8
Cleaning the windows 9

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 1/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Positions of optical signalization

“A” position

Circuit--breaker Closing spring


Open Loaded
Ðàçîìêíóò

“B” position

Circuit--breaker Closing spring


Closed Released
Çàìêíóò

“C” position

Circuit--breaker Closing spring


Closed Loaded
Çàìêíóò

“D” position

Circuit--breaker Closing spring


Open Released
Ðàçîìêíóò

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 2/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Safety measures

Circuit--breaker The table below gives the steps to prepare the circuit--breaker to work safely :
general preparing

Step Action Comment


1 Isolate the circuit--breaker from Shut down the circuit--breaker,
the network. de--energize and earth it.
2 Switch--off the supply circuit of
the reloading motor.
3 Check the SF6 pressure gas. Make sure that the SF6 pressure
gas is ≥ pme.
Below this level, no mechanical
operating is allowed.

Release the springs The table below gives the procedure to release the closing spring and the
opening spring depending the circuit--breaker state :

If the circuit--breaker
Action
position is ...
In the operating device, activate the
opening handle and the closing han-
dle like below :
Closed 1 -- Open
2 -- Close
3 -- Open

Activate the closing handle and the


opening handle like below :
1 -- Close
Open 2 -- Open

Check the optical Check that the operating mechanism’s optical signalization shows the sym-
signalization bols below :

Circuit--breaker Closing spring


Open Released

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 3/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Preparing the operating device

Introduction In order to perform certain maintenance operations inside the operating de-
vice it is necessary to remove some cabinet parts.

Removing The table below gives the steps of side panels removing :
side panels

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the nuts (2) from
the left side panel (3).

2
x2

M8 3
2 Take hold of the left side
panel (3) from underneath, 3
pull slightly towards the out-
side, then downwards to re-
move it.

3 Proceed in the same way


for the right side panel.

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 4/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Replacing an opening or closing electro-- magnet

Process The table below gives the steps of replacing an opening or closing electro--
magnet :

Step Action Diagram


1 Disconnect the supply wires from
the coil (9). 10

2 Extract the blade spring (10) by


pressing outwards on the rivet with
a finger.

3 Remove the core (11). 10


9

4 Remove the faulty coil and replace


it by a new one carrying the same 11
reference.

9
5 Reinstall the core (11).

6 Reinstall the blade spring (10).

7 Connect supply wires to the new


coil (9).

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 5/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Resumption of service

Installing the side Insert the side panel (3) under the edge of the roof plate (4). Press it down to
panels insert the mounting screws and fasten using nuts (2).
4

x2
2

M8

Continued on next page.

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 6/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Resumption of service, continued

Energizing The table below gives the resumption of service steps of the circuit--breaker
pole :

Step Action Comment


1 Re--energize the closing and
opening circuits.
2 Switch--on the motor supply cir- The motor starts--up and re-
cuit. loads the closing spring.

Check the optical Check that the operating mechanism’s optical signalization shows the sym-
signalization bols below :

Circuit--breaker Closing spring


Open Loaded

Conclusion The circuit--breaker is ready for normal use.

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 7/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Lubrication

Principle No future lubrication will be necessary. The bearings and rollers have been
lubricated in our workshops with special grease :
ASEOL SYLITEA 4--018

This grease can easily endure very low temperatures and has an excellent
resistance to ageing. So that its qualities are not modified during use, it is pro-
hibited to :

D Mix this grease with any other lubricant.


D Lubricate later with any other oil.
D Spray parts of the apparatus with a protective liquid against corrosion or
with any kind of lubricating oil.

Mixture with other lubricants can cause the layer of grease to become too
hard.

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 8/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

Cleaning the windows

Recommended To clean the windows, use exclusively soapy water.


product

DO NOT USE SCOURING PAD.

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 9/10
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 4 operating device

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L51--303EN/03
E AREVA 10/10
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

Presentation

Introduction Special tooling is necessary for :


★ commissioning,
✩ maintenance of the circuit--breaker.
Only the tools and accessories specified on ordering are delivered.
Commercially available tools (e.g. : spanners, torque wrenches, spirit
levels...) are not supplied.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Special tools 2
Accessories 6

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 1/8
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

Special tools

Table of special The table below gives the AREVA special tools (SF6 case) :
tools
NUMBER DESIGNATION USE
Transport of SF6 gas
EMPTY filling tools and
VLD001875.. TRANSPORT control tools.
★✩ CASE Inspection of
(OPTIONAL) densimeter
thresholds.

VLN55000408P SF6 filling,


FILLING TOOL
★✩ topping--up.

VL--02842117P
PRESSURE
+
GAUGE SF6 filling,
V0005499001P
0...0,765 MPa topping--up.
★✩
Inspection of
VL--02842118P densimeter
PRESSURE
+ thresholds.
GAUGE
V0005499001P
0...1 MPa
★✩

WATER
VL465059004P PRESSURE
Checking for leaks
✩ GAUGE
(OPTIONAL) ✩

VL--02557208P
PRESSURE
+
REDUCER SF6 filling,
VLN55161601P
0...0,765 MPa topping--up.
★✩
Inspection of
VL--02557392P densimeter
PRESSURE
+ thresholds.
REDUCER
VLN55161601P
0...1 MPa
★✩

Inspection of
V0000270121P
SET OF SEALS densimeter

thresholds.

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 2/8
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

Special tools, continued

Table of special The table below gives the continuation of AREVA special tools :
tools, continued
NUMBER DESIGNATION USE

V0001652002P
LIFTING STRAP
★✩ Handling of the pole.
(3m)
(x4/station)

V0001652001P
LIFTING STRAP
★✩ Handling of the pole.
(6m)
(x4/station)

VL--02236071P
LIFTING
★ Handling of the pole.
SHACKLE
(x4/station)

VLD00786901
Handling
★ WASHER
of the column.
(x8/station)

VLN55069303P
Handling
★ RING BOLT
of the column.
(x4/station)

V0004570001P
Blocking tool of the

pole operating shaft
(x1/pole BLOCKING TOOL
for replacing the
installed in
operating device.
factory)

V0000482002P
CENTRING Chambers/column
★✩
SPINDLES coupling.
(x1/station)

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 3/8
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

Special tools, continued

Table of special The table below gives the continuation of AREVA special tools :
tools, continued
NUMBER DESIGNATION USE

V0005025001P
Chambers/column
★✩ STOP
coupling.
(x1/station)

V0000508001P
Chambers/column
★✩ SCREWING TOOL
coupling.
(x1/station)

V0000571001P
Installing the
★✩ LEVER
operating device.
(x1/station)

V0000504001P
Chambers/column
★✩ PROTECTION
coupling.
(x1/station)

V0000486001P
Chambers/column
★✩ COUPLING PIN
coupling.
(x1/station)

VACUUM PUMP
VLN55001903P
110/220V

50 Hz (4,5 m3/h)

Vacuum operation
in pole.
VACUUM PUMP
VLN55001904P
115/230V

60 Hz (4,5 m3/h)

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 4/8
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

Special tools, continued

Table of special The table below gives the continuation of AREVA special tools :
tools, continued
NUMBER DESIGNATION USE

UNIVERSAL
CONNECTION
VLN55000406P Vacuum operation
1/2” GAZ
★ in pole.
AND
1/2” NPT

Checking
VLD00001901P gas--tightness of SF6
LEAK DETECTOR
★✩ filling plug. SF6 leak
detection.

Inspection of
densimeter
VL--02861501P thresholds.
TEST LAMP
✩ Inspection of
interruption contact
wear.

VLD00818001
CRANK HANDLE Spring reloading.

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 5/8
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

Accessories

Table of accessories The table below gives the AREVA accessories :

NUMBER DESIGNATION USE


42 kg
VL--01861432P
★✩ SF6 BOTTLE SF6 filling topping--up.

20 kg
VL--01861435P
★✩ SF6 BOTTLE SF6 filling topping--up.

10 kg
VL--01861434P
★✩ SF6 BOTTLE SF6 filling topping--up.

5 kg
VL--01861433P
★✩ SF6 BOTTLE SF6 filling topping--up.

12 kg
VL--01861451P
★✩ CF4 BOTTLE CF4 filling topping--up.

LOCTITE 262
VL--01818336P Screw locking.
(50 ml)

LOCTITE 225
VL--01818327P Screw sealing.
(250 ml)

GREASE Preparation
VL--01835265P
MOLYKOTE 111 of SF6 seals.

GREASE
VL--01835208P
MOBILPLEX 47 Lubricating screws
or before tightening to
VL--01835203P GREASE torques.
MOBILUX EP3

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 6/8
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

Accessories, continued

Table of accessories, The table below gives the continuation of AREVA accessories :
continued

NUMBER DESIGNATION USE

Preparation of
VASELINE
VL--01835106P electrical contact
204--9
surfaces.

Preparation of
CONTACTAL
VL--01835118P electrical contact
GREASE
surfaces.

GREASE
VL--01835251P General lubrication.
ASEOL 0--365.2

Preparation of
SCOTCH BRITE
VL--02212337P electrical contact
A -- VF
surfaces.

ABRASIVE Preparation of
VL--01831320P PAPER electrical contact
A 400 surfaces.

Preparation of
VL--02212334P RAG electrical contact
surfaces.

Preparation of
ROUND BRUSH
VL--02211842P electrical contact
br. 4
surfaces.

Preparation of
BRUSH
VL--02211831P electrical contact
br. 16
surfaces.

CAN OF
Preparation of SF6
VL--01861262P IZOPROPANOLA
seals.
(1 l)

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 7/8
Annexes
Tooling and accessories

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 L60--025EN/01
E AREVA 8/8
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SUMMARY

of PRODUCT SAFETY SHEETS


for equipment * manufactured by
AREVA T&D - AHT

SUBJECT Reference N° Revision Remarks

Summary PS 0000/A 03

Working environment PS 0001/A 02

Handling Operations PS 0002/A 02

Pressurized Equipment PS 0003/A 02

SF6 : Use and Handling. PS 0004/A 02 Not applicable to pneumatically


operated circuit breakers

Chemicals PS 0005/A 02

Electrical Equipment PS 0006/A 02

Machinery PS 0007/A 03

Operation PS 0008/A 03

Maintenance PS 0009/A 03

* : excluding lightning arresters.

PS 0000/A 03 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 Ch. MANIN 29/08/98 1/1


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
This page is intentionally blank.
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

WORKING

ENVIRONMENT

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Any negligence as regards site organisation may cause an accident.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

All remedial action, for all life-cycles of the equipment, must be carried out in a safe working environment.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

PS 0001/A 02 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 P. VANDAME 98-08-28 1/2


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Personnel :
- Appropriate clothing, gloves, helmet, safety boots,
harness, etc..
X X X X X X X
- The personnel concerned must be familiar with the
basic working regulations governing a given work
station: mechanical, dielectric, pressure hazards, etc..

2 Handling Equipment :
- This must be in good working order, regularly X X X X X X X
maintained, properly adjusted and compliant with the
standards in force in the country of use.

3 Tools in General :
- Only use tools appropriate to the type of work to be X X X X X
carried out.

4 Working Area :
- Make sure the floor is safe (free from oil, blunt
X X X X X
objects, etc.).
- The site must be properly demarcated and kept clear.

PS 0001/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 2/2


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

HANDLING OPERATIONS

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Any handling operation may involve danger : - for the personnel,


- for the equipment being handled,
- for the installations or equipment in the vicinity.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

As a general rule, handling operations must be carried out by personnel familiar with the basic handling
regulations, using equipment in good working order, and wearing the appropriate protective clothing or
equipment.

Ensure that the condition of the cases is such that they can be safely handled (state of the wood, shock-
resistance, etc.).

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

PS 0002/A 02 G. BERNARD 1998-08-11 F. PIRAUD 98-09-08 1/3


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Handling operations must be carried out by personnel


X X X X X X X
familiar with the basic handling regulations.

Personnel must be qualified to operate lifting equipment,


X X X X X X X
cranes, overhead conveyors, etc..

Equipment in proper working order :


- Equipment must be checked and maintained regularly in
X X X X X X X
accordance with local regulations.
- All equipment must be properly housed.

Familiarity with the load to be handled (see details on the


X X X X X X X
case).

Use of the appropriate handling equipment :


- Type of sling(s),
X X X X X X X
- Correct slinging methods,
- Use of special AREVA handling equipment.

Follow the handling instructions on :


- the cases (pictorial symbols: centre of gravity, slinging
X X X
points, etc.),
- the assembly instructions.

Compliance with the relevant work station safety instructions


X X X X X X
(proximity of electrical equipment).

Operator Safety :
- use of gloves, helmets, safety boots, etc., X X X X X X X
- loads not to be carried with personnel underneath.

PS 0002/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-11 2/3


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Handling of insulating jackets at transport pressure (300 hPa


X X X
maximum).

Ensure that cases have not been damaged during handling


X
or prolonged storage.

Follow the stacking instructions. X X X

It is essential to open cases from the top and to take care


X
when unpacking.

Before handling any hydraulically operated component,


X X
bring oil pressure back to atmospheric pressure.

Before handling any mechanically operated component,


X X
disable the springs.

Bring insulating jacket working pressure back to transport


X X
pressure (300 hPa maximum).

PS 0002/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-11 3/3


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
This page is intentionally blank.
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Our equipment includes gas pressure assemblies (SF6, nitrogen, air, etc.) or fluids (oil).

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

· Comply with the storage, transport and operating instructions supplied with our equipment.

· Before initial filling and pressurizing, check the overall condition of the shielding concerned :
- no signs of impact, splitting or chipping on the porcelain components, etc.,
- no visible damage to hoses and/or rigid pipes (cuts, folds, corrosion, etc.) or to fittings and metal
protection (accumulators, tank, etc.).

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

As a general rule, all work on pressurized equipment must be carried out by qualified personnel.

PS 0003/A 02 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 F. PIRAUD 98-09-08 1/3


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Pressurized Equipment : General.

1.1 Comply with the assembly instructions shown on


X X X X X X X
both our equipment and the gas bottles.

1.2 Before starting work on any pressurized piece of


X X X X
equipment, make sure there is no pressure.

1.3 Before any handling, check to see how the


equipment is fixed to its frame and how the frame is X X X X
itself anchored.

1.4 High-pressure pipes must be fixed or otherwise


X X X X
made safe.

1.5 Before initial pressurization, check that all circuits


X X X X
are properly sealed.

1.6 Never tighten a pressure fitting. X X X X

1.7 Ensure that for every bolted connection for a volume


under pressure there is an appropriate and properly X X
fastened bolt at each relevant point.

1.8 It is strictly forbidden to lift or otherwise move a


piece of equipment inflated to a pressure in excess X X X X X
of 300 hPa of gas.

1.9 Before giving any orders to move equipment, check


visually or by ear that all the relevant pipe fittings X X X
are tight.

1.10 Comply with the standard instructions governing the


use of compressed gas bottles (e.g. keep the bottle X X X X X X X
away from any source of heat).

PS 0003/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 2/3


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

2 SF6 Pressure Equipment.

2.1 See SF6 Safety Sheet. X X X X X X X

2.2 An effective pressure of 300 hPa, used for the


transport and storage of our products, is not X X X X X
regarded as a potential hazard.

2.3 Always fill the unit using the appropriate equipment,


X X X
which should include a safety valve.

2.4 Do not inflate over and above the prescribed


X X X
pressure.

2.5 It is strictly forbidden to release SF6 to atmosphere.


All discharged gas must without exception be X X X X X
recovered.

3 Hydraulic Equipment.

3.1 Circuit Purging.


This must be done under pressure. Use the X X
appropriate equipment.

3.2 Hydraulic Control Unit.


The doors must be kept shut except when control X X
tests are being carried out.

PS 0003/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 3/3


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
This page is intentionally blank.
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

SF6
Use and Handling

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) is a gas which in its basic state is colourless, odourless and tasteless. It is not toxic,
but it cannot sustain life. It is a heavy gas that is dispersed slowly into the atmosphere.

In its natural state, SF6 is delivered and stored in pressurized tanks (bottles or spheres) at a pressure of
approximately 20 bar at 20°C (in its liquid form) and complies with IEC standard 376.

However, under the effect of the electric arc, the SF6 molecules break up and the elements mostly recombine
during cooling either due to extinction of the arc or by regeneration caused by the presence of active
absorbent charges within the circuit breaker.
Various chemical reactions, associated with the volatilization of the materials in contact with the electric arc,
create either fluoridized or sulphurous secondary gas products or solid products in the form of metallic fluoride
powder ; or again, in the presence of traces of water or moisture, hydrofluoric acid or sulphur dioxide.

In the life-cycle of the equipment, SF6 can be observed not only in its pure state, but also in its contaminated
state :

- the use of new SF6 for filling or adding,


- leaks under normal operating conditions,
- maintenance involving the opening of circuit breakers containing old SF6 (decomposition products),
- abnormal conditions (internal arc fault causing the shielding to break),
- circuit breaker recycling on end of life-cycle.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

Follow the instructions for the transport of pressurized containers.

The storage of these containers is governed by the same storage regulations as compressed gas bottles :
- keep away from any source of heat and in a cool, dry and well-ventilated area,
- always fit a pressure reducing valve.

PS 0004/A 02 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 Ch. MANIN 29/8/98 1/3


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

Whilst SF6 in its pure state is not toxic, the decomposition products have varying degrees of toxicity. They may
irritate the skin, the eyes and the mucous membranes; and in massive amounts may cause serious lesions
(oedema, heart failure, circulatory disorders and unconsciousness).
However, very rapidly and before there is any real danger, signs such as a pungent smell, irritation of the
mucous of the nose, the eyes and the mouth will give a warning and the personnel concerned will have
sufficient time to take the necessary safety actions.

Where the gas is used or handled within enclosed premises, ensure adequate ventilation, especially low down.
If the gas is inhaled, the area concerned must be evacuated immediately.

Under normal operating conditions, leaks are exceptionally minor and not critical, even when the gas contains
impurities (due to the regenerating filters in the circuit breaker).

Filling and where necessary topping up operations must be carried out using the appropriate tools.

During maintenance operations, or at the end of the life-cycle, dust inside the equipment must be removed by
a vacuum extractor and the operator should wear a mask. Gas recovery must be carried out using the
appropriate gas recovery equipment.

Gases and decomposition products must be treated and/or disposed of by specialist organizations.

Under extremely abnormal conditions (e.g. break in the shielding) in an enclosed space, individual protective
equipment is recommended.

Lastly, it is forbidden to smoke, drink, eat or keep food in the vicinity of open SF6 equipment, whether indoors
or outside (harmful dust).

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

It is essential that both the fitter and the user read IEC Technical Report 1634 regarding the use and
handling of sulphur hexafluoride gas.

PS 0004/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 2/3


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Transport of SF6 X X

Pure SF6 X X X X X

Contaminated SF6 X X X

PS 0004/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 3/3


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
This page is intentionally blank.
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

CHEMICALS

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Generally speaking, the products used for installation and commissioning are bought chemical products,
namely :

- Hydraulic oil - Grease - Loctite


- Touching-up paint - Isopropanol - Drying agents

These must be kept in their original packing and the tops replaced after use.

Some packing products require careful handling as they may contain preservatives.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

As a general rule, chemical products must be used and stored away from any source of heat. Smoking is to be
avoided.

Avoid contact with the skin and any splashes to the eyes.

Take the basic health and safety precautions.

Products and packing must be destroyed in accordance with local environmental regulations.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

Other products: SF6 (see relevant sheet)

PS 0005/A 02 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 Ch. MANIN 29/8/98 1/2


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Drying Agents X X X X X

Hydraulic Oil X X X X X X X

Consumables (Grease & Paint) (Isopropanol) X X X X X

Loctite X X

PS 0005/A 02 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 2/2


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Our equipment is subjected to high and low tension loads that could expose the personnel to the risk of
electrocution.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

The operating company is responsible for ensuring compliance with the safety instructions governing high
tension.

The basic regulations in respect of low tension installations must also be complied with.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

All work on high-tension networks and low-tension installations must be performed by qualified operators
wearing personal protective clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.

PS 0006/A 02 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 G. RENAUDIN 1998-09-02 1/2


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 High Tension.

1.1 Comply with the regulations governing the work station. X X X X X

1.2 In the case of items equipped with capacitors, make


sure they are discharged prior to removal and short- X X
circuited while work is being carried out.

2 Low Tension.

2.1 Prior to any work on the low-tension circuit or


X X X X X
equipment, cut off the power supply.

2.2 When replacing an electrical component on the control


equipment, follow the safety instructions shown in the X X
"Machinery" safety sheet.

PS 0006/A 02 1996-04-04 1998-08-12 2/2


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

MACHINERY

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Our equipment contains moving parts (linkage, levers, etc.), reserve power (springs, accumulators, etc.)
and pressurized sheathing ; the associated hazards are dealt with in safety sheet "Pressurized Equipment"
PS 0003/A.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

Follow the relevant AREVA operating and maintenance instructions.

Prior to any work on the control equipment and the motion transfer mechanism, disable the springs on
mechanically operated units and bring pressure back to zero for hydraulically operated units.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

As a general rule, work on the control equipment and transmissions must be performed by qualified operators
wearing personal protective clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.

PS 0007/A 03 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 G. RENAUDIN 1998-09-02 1/2


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Moving Parts.

1.1 Before any work is carried out on transmission


components, ensure that the control equipment has X X X X X
been deactivated.

2 Spring-operated Mechanism.

2.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off all power to the
X X X X X
reset motor.

2.2 Deactivate the opening and closing springs in


X X X X X
accordance with AREVA instructions.

2.3 Make sure that all safety rules are complied with while
X X X X X
the work is being carried out.

3 Hydraulic Mechanism.

3.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off power to the
X X X X X
motor pump.

3.2 Reduce the pressure of the hydraulic circuit to zero. X X X X X

PS 0007/A 03 1996-04-04 1998-08-12 2/2


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

OPERATION

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

If the unit shows any sign of an unwanted condition, it must be examined by the user.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

The operators concerned must be suitably qualified and must comply with the normal operating and
maintenance instructions issued by AREVA.

Depending on the severity of the fault observed, the necessary corrective measures must be taken, e.g :
- replenish the SF6 gas in the event of a leak,
- isolate the system in the event of a major malfunction.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

PS 0008/A 03 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 P. VANDAME 98.08.28 1/2


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Opening malfunction :
COMPLY WITH THE SPECIFIC INSTRUCTION PROVIDED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES :

- to do with the sequencing chain, X X


- following a mechanical fault.

Cut-off failure. X

External dielectric flash-over. X

SF6 pressure drop due to either :


- major leak (switch to 2nd threshold), X X
- no 1st threshold alarm complement.

Loss of motor power :


X X
- oil, compressed air, component failure.

Activation of safety device, if fitted. X

Use only the appropriate products recommended


X X X X
by AREVA.

Abnormal noise. X X

PS 0008/A 03 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 2/2


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

MAINTENANCE

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

· To ensure safe and unimpaired operation of the equipment, regular maintenance is essential.
Neglected maintenance can create hazards.

· Maintenance operations involve hazards that must be guarded against.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

· Comply with the maintenance programme and service intervals shown in the AREVA manuals.

· In addition, every maintenance operation must comply with the following requirements :
- it must be carried out by suitably qualified personnel,
- both the work involved and the associated hazards must be clearly identified beforehand,
- the tools and equipment used (standard or specific to AREVA) must be appropriate and in proper
working order,
- any replacement parts must be AREVA parts.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND


OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

· Refer to the relevant SAFETY sheets.

· The safety instructions below are general and not exhaustive. They should therefore be modified and/or
supplemented for all specific maintenance operations to be carried out.

PS 0009/A 03 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 P. VANDAME 98.08.28 1/2


Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
High voltage switchgear

MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION

SCRAPPING &
TRANSPORT

OPERATION

RECYCLING
START-UP
PACKING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Identify the equipment to be worked on and ensure it is


X X X
switched off.

Obtain as much information as possible from the user


X X X
regarding the condition of the unit.

Check that the unit is earthed both upstream and


X X X
downstream.

Demarcate the work area. X X X

Ensure that the operator is equipped with the personal


protective clothes and equipment required (safety glasses, X X X
gloves, safety boots, harness, etc.).

Ensure that the equipment used is compliant and in good


condition (scaffolding, slings, suspended platforms, electrical X X X
equipment, tools, etc.).

Ensure that the safety instructions in respect of each


X X X
particular hazard are complied with.

PS 0009/A 03 1996-03-18 1998-08-12 2/2


Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page
QUALITÉ - QUALITY
Critère d'Acceptation ENVIRONNEMENT - ENVIRONMENT
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA SÉCURITÉ - SECURITY

ÉMETTEUR - TRANSMITTER : N° CRITÈRE D’ACCEPTATION


QUALITE MONTAGE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA NUMBER
QUALITY DEPARTEMENT CA 103 181 3
18/03/2008 INDICE : 002

OBJET - TITLE :
DISJONCTEUR GL318 (D) A COMMANDE MECANIQUE FK3.4 - MONTAGE SITE
CIRCUIT BREAKER GL318 WITH SPRING MECHANISM – SITE ERECTION

- DESTINATAIRES - EXEMPLARIES :

GIL Veronique
VALLA Jean-yves
ATTENCIA Bernard
THION René
LABADIE Jean-Claude
VENARD Pierre LICENCIES
Pas de poste OPM en diffusion

Rédacteur(s) : Approbateur(s) : Vérificateur(s) :


Drafter visa Approver visa Supervisor visa
MALATIER Thierry CREUSOT Christophe GREJON Olivier
Signé le 07/03/2008 Signé le 17/03/2008 Signé le 17/03/2008

CA 103 181 3 002 18/03/2008 1/5


N° d’Instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page
Instruction Ist issue Revision Sheet
Le présent document est à la propriété de AREVA. Remis à titre This document is the sole property of AREVA. It is submitted on a
confidentiel, il ne peut être communiqué à des tiers ni utilisé ou reproduit confidential basis and may not be passed on to third parties, used or
qu’en stricte conformité d’autorisations expresses préalables. reproduced except in exact accordance with prior express permission.

HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCTS - 130, rue Léon Blum 69611- Villeurbanne Cedex - France
Tél : +33 (0)4 72 68 34 34 - Fax : +33 (0)4 72 68 39 22
VALIDITÉ
VALIDITY

DISJONCTEUR : GL 318 (D)


CIRCUIT BREAKER

COMMANDE : MÉCANIQUE FK 3.4


MECHANISM : SPRING MECHANISM

DÉFINITION DES DURÉES TIME DEFINITION

DURÉE DE FERMETURE : Intervalle de temps CLOSING TIME : Interval of time between


entre l'instant de mise sous tension du circuit de energizing the closing circuit and the instant when
fermeture et l'instant où les contacts se touchent the contacts touch in all poles.
dans tous les pôles.

DURÉE D'OUVERTURE : Intervalle de temps OPENING TIME : Interval of time between the
entre l'instant de mise sous tension du instant of energizing the opening release and the
déclencheur et l'instant de la séparation des instant when the arcing contacts have separated in
contacts d'arc sur tous les pôles (ou des contacts all poles (or simulator contacts controled by the
du simulateur commandés par la charge fictive). dummy load).

DURÉE D'OUVERTURE-FERMETURE : Intervalle OPEN-CLOSE TIME : Interval of time between the


de temps entre l'instant de séparation des contacts instant when the arcing contacts have separated in
dans tous les pôles, et l'instant où les contacts se all poles and the instant when the contacts touch in
touchent dans le premier pôle pendant une the first pôle during a reclosing operation (reclosing
manoeuvre de refermeture (refermeture : l'appareil : the equipment is automatically reclosed after a
est refermé automatiquement après un intervalle predetermined interval of time -195 ms-).
de temps prédéterminé -195 ms-).

DURÉE DE FERMETURE-OUVERTURE : CLOSE OPEN TIME : Interval of time between the


Intervalle de temps entre l'instant où les contacts instant when the contacts touch in the first pole
se touchent dans le premier pôle pendant une during a closing operation, and the instant when
manoeuvre de fermeture, et l'instant où les the arcing contacts have separated in all poles
contacts d'arc sont séparés dans tous les pôles during the subsequent opening operation (the
pendant la manoeuvre d'ouverture qui lui fait suite opening release is energizing when the contacts
(le déclencheur d'ouverture est mis sous tension touch in the first pole during the closing operation).
au moment où les contacts se touchent dans le
premier pôle pendant la fermeture).

ÉCART DE SIMULTANÉITÉ ENTRE CHAMBRES DEVIATION BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THE


D'UN MÊME PÔLE : Pour la même manoeuvre SAME POLE : For the same operation maximum
différence de temps maximale entre les instants où deviation between the instants when the chambers
les contacts des chambres se touchent à la contacts touch during the closing operation and
fermeture et différence de temps maximale entre maximum deviation between the instants when the
les instants de séparation des contacts des chambers contacts are separated during the
chambres à l'ouverture. opening operation.

CA 103 181 3 4/07/2003 002 18/03/2008 2/5


N° d’Instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page
Instruction Ist issue Revision Sheet
ÉCART DE SIMULTANÉITÉ ENTRE PÔLES : Pour DEVIATION BETWEEN POLES : For the same
la même manoeuvre, différence de temps maximale operation maximum deviation between the instants
entre les instants où les contacts de pôles se touchent when the poles contacts touch during the closing
à la fermeture et différence de temps maximale entre operation and maximum deviation between the
les instants de séparation des contacts des pôles à instants when the pales contacts are separated
l'ouverture. during the opening operation.
Dans le cas de pôle multi-chambres, le pôle est In the case of multichambers poles, the pole is
considéré fermé quand la dernière chambre est considered closed when the last chamber is closed
fermée et il est considéré ouvert quand la première and it is considered opened when the first chamber
chambre est ouverte. is opened.

DUREE D’INSERTION DE LA RESISTANCE : sur RESISTOR INSERTION TIME : during a closing


une manœuvre de fermeture, intervalle de temps operation, interval of time between the instant
entre l’entrée en contact des contacts d’arc et when the arcing contacts are touching and the
l’entrée en contact des contacts de l’inséreur instant when the inseror contacts are touching
(résistance court-circuitée). (resistance short-circuited).

CA 103 181 3 4/07/2003 002 18/03/2008 3/5


N° d’Instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page
Instruction Ist issue Revision Sheet
DURÉES DE FONCTIONNEMENT (en ms à tension assignée)
MECHANICAL OPERATING TIMES ( in ms at rated voltage)

DURÉES DES CHAMBRES


TIMINGS OF CHAMBERS

MANOEUVRE Minimum Maximum


OPERATION
Fermeture - Closing 94 114
Ouverture O1/O2 - Opening O1/O2 20 26
Fermeture par relais TEC – Closing with relay TEC 104 129
Fermeture par relais Allen Bradley - Closing with relay Allen Bradley 114 139
Ouverture O1/O2 par relais TEC - Opening with relay O1/O2 with relay 28 42
TEC
Ouverture O1/O2 par relais Allen Bradley - Opening O1/O2 with relay 38 52
Allen Bradley
Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO 94 114
Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO 20 26
CO 65 90
1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO 20 26
Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO 94 114
2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO 20 26
Insertion de la résistance à la fermeture – Resistor insertion on closing 5.5 9,0

DURÉES DES CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES


TIMINGS OF AUXILIARY CONTACTS

TYPE DE CONTACT - MANOEUVRE Minimum Maximum


TYPE CONTACT - OPERATION
Type a / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO 101 131
Type b / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO 78 108
Type a / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO 11 24
Type b / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO 22 35
Type a / 1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO 11 22
Type b / 1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO 22 33
Type a / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO 101 131
Type b / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO 78 108
Type a / 2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO 11 24
Type b / 2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO 22 35

CA 103 181 3 04/07/2003 002 18/03/2008 4/5


N° d’Instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page
Instruction Ist issue Revision Sheet
ÉCART ENTRE CHAMBRES D'UN MÊME POLE (en ms à tension assignée)
DEVIATIONS BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THE SAME POLE (in ms at rated voltage)

MANOEUVRE Maximum
OPERATION
Fermeture - Closing 2
Ouverture - Opening 2

ÉCART ENTRE POLES (en ms à tension assignée)


DEVIATIONS BETWEEN POLES (in ms at rated voltage)

MANOEUVRE Maximum
OPERATION
Fermeture - Closing 4
Ouverture - Opening 2,8

DURÉES DE REARME (en s à tension assignée)


CHARGING TIME (in s at rated voltage)

Tension Moteur en V
Maximum
Motor Voltage in V
toutes 10
all

RESISTANCE DE CONTACT DU CIRCUIT PRINCIPAL (sans prise de courant)


(en μΩ sous courant continu de 100 A)
MAIN CIRCUIT RESISTANCE (without HV terminal)
(in μΩ with a 100 A direct current)

Type de chambre
Maximum par tête
Type of chamber
Maximum by head
105/4 90
105/5 95
105/11 95
105/13 95

CA 103 181 3 04/07/2003 002 18/03/2008 5/5


N° d’Instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page
Instruction Ist issue Revision Sheet
Point-on-Wave Controller
Series RPH2
Service Manual

58.020.034 E
This page is intentionally blank.
RPH2 Service Manual
CONTENTS

1. IN GENERAL 6

1.1. Handling of electronic equipment 6

1.2. Unpacking 6

1.3. Storage 6

1.4. Installation 6

1.5. Technical data 7

2. INTRODUCTION 8

2.1. Using the handbook 8

2.2. Models available, Assembly 8

2.3. Additional modules 8


2.3.1. Signal module: Option S 8
2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I 9
2.3.3. Analogue module: Option A 9
2.3.3.1 Option A0 9
2.3.3.2 Option A1 10
2.3.3.3 Option A3 10
2.3.3.4 List of available models 10

2.4. Elements on the front of the device 10


2.4.1. Graphic display 10
2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display 10
2.4.2. Key-operated switch 11
2.4.2.1 Position "OFF" 11
2.4.2.2 Position "OPERATION" 11
2.4.3. LED indicators 11
2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green) 11
2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red) 11
2.4.4. Keys 12
2.4.5. Serial interface 12

2.5. Menu system 12


2.5.1. Menu structure 14

3. APPLICATION NOTES 16

3.1. General Description of the Functions 16


3.1.1. Synchronized switching 16
3.1.1.1 Closing 16
3.1.1.2 Opening 17

Page 1/73
AREVA T&D Austria AG Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02-12

Compiled: Approved: File code:


2004-02-12 2004-02-12
THS/ U.Samitz VEV/ K. Bauer RPHDOC_E.DOC
3.1.2. Circuit breaker 17
3.1.3. RPH2 structure 17
3.1.4. Function of the RPH2 18
3.1.4.1 Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum 18
3.1.4.2 Breaking of an inductive current 19
3.1.4.3 Switching program 20

3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors 20


3.2.1. Closing 21
3.2.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral 21
3.2.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral 21
3.2.2. Opening 21
3.2.3. Data on circuit breaker required 21
3.2.3.1 Closing 21
3.2.3.2 Opening 22
3.2.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy 22

3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups 22


3.3.1. Closing 22
3.3.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral 22
3.3.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral 22
3.3.2. Opening 22
3.3.3. Data on circuit breaker required 22
3.3.3.1 Closing 23
3.3.3.2 Opening 23
3.3.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy 23

3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors 23


3.4.1. Closing 23
3.4.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral 23
3.4.1.2.Networks with isolated Neutral 23
3.4.2. Opening 24
3.4.3. Data on circuit breaker required 24
3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy 27

3.5 Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines 28

4 FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES 29

4.1 Signal Module: Option S 29


4.1.1 Alarm outputs 29
4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs 29
4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time 29
4.1.2.2 Remote reset 31
4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization 31
4.2 Analogue Module: Option A 31
4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation 32
4.2.2 Temperature Compensation 33
4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation 35
4.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors 37
4.2.5 Adaptive Control 37

4.3 Current Module Option I 38

Page 2
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
5 RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM 39

5.1 System data 39


5.1.1 Password 39
5.1.2 System Frequency 39
5.1.3 Control Voltage 40
5.1.4 Rated Pressure 40
5.1.5 Switching Program 40
5.1.5.1 User Program 41
5.1.6 Function Channel 1 42
5.1.7 Language 42
5.1.8 Time / Date 42
5.1.9 New Password 42
5.1.10 Selftest Start 43
5.1.11 Selftest Interval 43

5.2 CB Data 44
5.2.1 Operating Time CH1 44
5.2.2 Operating Time CH2 44
5.2.3 Arcing Time CH1 44
5.2.4 Arcing Time CH2 45
5.2.5 Auxiliary Timeshift CH1 45
5.2.6 Auxiliary Timeshift CH2 45
5.2.7 Adaptive Control 45
5.2.7.1 Weighting Factor 46
5.2.7.2 Adaptive Times CH1 46
5.2.7.3 Adaptive Times CH2 46
5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times 46
5.2.8 Compensation 46
5.2.9 kU1 Voltage CH1 46
5.2.10 kP1 Pressure CH1 47
5.2.11 Temperature Compensation CH1 47
5.2.12 Table Temp. CH1 47
5.2.12.1 Delta_t xx°C 47
5.2.13 kU2 Voltage CH2 48
5.2.14 kP2 Pressure CH2 48
5.2.15 Temperature Compensation CH2 48
5.2.16 Table Temp. CH1 48
5.2.16.1 Delta_t xx°C 48

5.3 Analogue Data 48


5.3.1 Thresholds 48
5.3.1.1 Current max. 48
5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max. 49
5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min. 49
5.3.1.4 Temperature max. 49
5.3.1.5 Temperature min. 50
5.3.1.6 Pressure max. 50
5.3.1.7 Pressure min. 50
5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim 51
5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec 51
5.3.4 Actual Control Voltage 52
5.3.5 Temperature 52
5.3.5.1 Value at 4 mA 52
5.3.5.2 Value at 20 mA 53

Page 3
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.3.6 Pressure 53
5.3.6.1 Value at 4 mA 53
5.3.6.2 Value at 20 mA 54

5.4 Alarms 54
5.4.1 Reset Obligatory 54
5.4.2 Lock-Out 55
5.4.3 Alarm List 55
5.4.3.1 Lock-out 56
5.4.3.2 Frequency min 56
5.4.3.3 Frequency max. 56
5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak) 57
5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure 57
5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure 57
5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate 57
5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded 57
5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated 57
5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR 57
5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR 57
5.4.3.12 Selftest CH2 ERROR 58
5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min 58
5.4.3.14 Command Time CH2 min 58
5.4.3.15 Operating Time min 58
5.4.3.16 Operating Time max. 58
5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure 59
5.4.3.18 Archive Full 59
5.4.3.19 Archive Failure 59
5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min 59
5.4.3.21 Control Voltage max. 59
5.4.3.22 Temperature min 59
5.4.3.23 Temperature max. 60
5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault 60
5.4.3.25 Pressure min 60
5.4.3.26 Pressure max. 60
5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault 60

5.5 Measurement 60
5.5.1 Current Graphs 60
5.5.2 Measured Times 61
5.5.2.1 Command OUT 61
5.5.2.2 CB Signal received 61
5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time 62
5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time 62
5.5.3 Frequency 62
5.5.4 Current (RMS) 63
5.5.5 Control Voltage 63
5.5.6 Actual Temperature 63
5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation 64
5.5.8 Additional Operating Times 64
5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1 64
5.5.8.2 Voltage CH2 64
5.5.8.3 Temperature CH1 65
5.5.8.4 Temperature CH2 65
5.5.8.5 Pressure CH1 65
5.5.8.6 Pressure CH2 65

Page 4
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3) 66
5.5.10 Pressure (L1) 66

5.6 Auxiliary functions 66


5.6.1 Alarm Input 66
5.6.2 Alarm Output 67
5.6.3 Error Type 67

5.7 Switching archive 67

6 COMMISSIONING 68

6.1 Commissioning preliminaries 68


6.1.1 Settings 68
6.1.1.1 Factory Settings 68
6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings 68
6.1.2 Inspection 69
6.1.3 First operation 70

Page 5
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
1. IN GENERAL

1.1. Handling of electronic equipment


A person can cause an electronic potential of many thousands of volts.
When this potential is discharged into appliances with semiconductor components,
serious damage can occur which is not immediately evident, but can still impair
operational reliability.

The electronic switching circuit of the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller from AREVA
T&D Austria AG, Leonding meets all the requirements concerning electromagnetic
compatibility in accordance with the EN 50 081-1/1992 and EN 50 082-2/1995.

Care is necessary only if the plug-in unit is pulled out of the casing. Take care not to
touch the plug contact on the back! For storing and transporting loose plug-in units, we
recommend a conductive fail packaging.

As soon as the plug-in unit is properly installed in the casing, no safety measures are
necessary at all.

1.2. Unpacking
Despite the general robust construction of the Point-on-Wave Controller, it must be
handled with care before installation. Before accepting the Point-on-Wave Controller it
should be checked for damage which could have originated during transportation. If
you have cause for complaint, please refer to the transport company and notify a
person responsible at AREVA.

1.3. Storage
If the Point-on-Wave Controller is not to be installed immediately upon receipt, it
should be stored in a place which is free of dust and moisture, in its original packaging.
If a moisture-absorption bag is in the packaging, leave it as it is. The effectiveness of
the drying agent is impaired if the non-protected bag is subjected to the surrounding
conditions.
Before the Point-on-Wave Controller is placed in the box again, warm the drying bag
slightly in order to regenerate the drying agent.

Storage temperature: -40 °C to +70 °C

1.4. Installation
The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller can either be installed in a switchboard or a
suitable frame with the provided material (panel cut-out see diagram 58.001.115), or a
special fitting is available for wall mounting (see diagram 58.001.116).

Page 6
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
We suggest the control room or the relays room as the most favourable installation
site. Installation in a heated outdoor control cubicle is also possible. Installation directly
in the operating mechanism of a circuit breaker is not provided for (please contact
AREVA regarding this).
The position should be well lit in order to make inspections easier.

Wiring is carried out according to the wiring diagram which is enclosed with every
Point-on-Wave Controller. Take care to earth the housing appropriately.

1.5. Technical data


supply voltage Nominal: 48 V - 250 VDC
(= CB trip coil voltage): Operative range: 35 V - 300 VDC
special power supply for 48 V -44 % ANSI-Standard available
power consumption: < 20 W

reference voltage (L1/N): Nominal: 100/Ö3 V; 220/Ö3 V AC


Operative range: 15 V -105 VAC; 30 V - 250 VAC
rated frequency: 16 2/3 / 50 / 60 Hz ±10 %
power consumption of measuring inputs: < 2 VA

maximum permissible current of CB trip coil: 14.5 A/ phase for 1 sec.


minimum command time: 100 ms
polarity of command impulse: positive
resolution of time setting: 0.1 ms
accuracy of switching times over
temperature range -55 °C to +55 °C ±0.3 ms

current inputs: 1 A and 5 A


rated short time current: 100 x In / 1 s
accuracy of current measurement ±10% (0.5 In ... 4 In)

measurement control voltage internal


input temperature measurement: 4...20 mA of Pt 100
input pressure measurement: 4...20 mA of pressure sensor
accuracy of measurement by RPH2:
control voltage ±3%
ambient temperature ±3%
hydraulic pressure ±3%

signalling inputs: potential free contacts required


(e.g. CB or neutral ground disconnector position,
CB aux. contacts, external reset)

indication outputs: potential free contacts


contact rating 24-250 V AC/DC ± 25 %,
max. 70 VA/ max. 3 A

communication port: RS 232, DC decoupled

Page 7
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
2. INTRODUCTION

2.1. Using the handbook


This handbook will guide the user through the setting-up procedure for the Point-on-
Wave Controller.
It explains the additional functions of this appliance, and how they are selected and
used. In addition, some examples of its usage are given, the theory behind it examined
and explained, and which circuit breaker and main data are absolutely necessary for
operation.
The handbook shows the complete list of all menu points with cross-references to the
chapter with the accompanying descriptions. The menu point order for the individual
modules is shown on this list as well.
Notes on checking and commissioning are given in the last chapter.

2.2. Models available, Assembly


The RPH2 is available in 2 basic models:
· RPH2-1xx: for one switching function (closing or opening alternatively)
· RPH2-2xx: for 2 switching functions
channel 1 for closing, channel 2 for opening
(only when using the given switching programs)

The 7 alarm LED's are active, however there is only one alarm contact (Alarm 1)
available. In addition, there is an alarm contact "Device not ready".

The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is assembled in a modular system. The function


can be extended through the combination of various modules. Extending the function
at a later date is only possible by the manufacturer.

The casing is a standard 19 inch sub-rack, with half width for one device or
alternatively with full width for 2 devices. After removing the 4 external screws of the
front panel, the plug-in unit on the grip rail can be removed from the housing. Safety
notes see 1.1.

2.3. Additional modules

2.3.1. Signal module: Option S


This module offers 6 alarm outputs (alarm 2 to alarm 7) and 6 optoelectronic coupler
inputs. Inputs 1-3 serve as circuit breaker monitors via its auxiliary contacts. With this
the pole operating times can be measured. Resolution 0.5 ms.
Input 4 serves as an input for a remote-reset. Inputs 5 and 6 are not in use at present.
A further input is used for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be switched in parallel
with other Point-on-Wave Controllers.

Page 8
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I
With this the phase currents during the switching process can be recorded and
graphically displayed. Data from the last 4 switching operations (curves, amplitudes) are
stored in a non volatile memory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values are
shown after feeding in the current transformer ratios.

2.3.3. Analogue module: Option A


Independent of the breaking system and the kind of operating mechanism, the operating
times of a circuit breaker change in dependence on certain service parameters:

With reduced control voltage at the circuit breaker coil there is less energy available to
change the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operating time
extends itself. (Valid for all types of operations.)

By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carry out
the switching movement changes.

The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electrical
resistance of the trip coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gas are
dependent on the temperature. In addition, changes of length in the driving linkage and
the porcelains occur. All these parameters influence the operating time in different ways.

In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by some
milliseconds. The RPH2 with option A is in the position to compensate these operating
time alterations.
There are inputs available for the measurements acquired when measuring the control
voltage, pressure and temperature for the compensation of pole operating times.

The control voltage is measured directly in the RPH2 at the input terminals for the
auxiliary voltage. There are no external measuring devices necessary.
For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducer
banks (2 conductor constructions, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal
(4...20 mA) are necessary. The supply for the transducer bank is effected by the RPH2.
Up to 8 RPH2's can be switched in parallel on one temperature sensor. When
measuring pressure, an individual transducer is necessary for each circuit breaker
(option A1) or each circuit breaker pole (option A3). The measuring range of the
measuring instruments depends on the requirements and can be simply parameterized
in the RPH2.

Three types of this additional module are available:

2.3.3.1. Option A0
Measuring and compensation of control voltage and temperature (for springloaded
drives)

Page 9
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
2.3.3.2. Option A1
Same design as 2.3.3.1, however with additional measurement and compensation for
hydraulic pressure (for hydraulic drives which have a mutual pressure generation for all
three poles).

2.3.3.3. Option A3
Like 2.3.3.2, however for circuit breakers which have pressure generation per pole.

2.3.3.4. List of available models

RPH2-1 RPH2-1S RPH2-1I RPH2-1A0 RPH2-1A1


RPH2-2 RPH2-2S RPH2-2I RPH2-2A0 RPH2-2A1

RPH2-1A3 RPH2-1SI RPH2-1SA0 RPH2-1SA1 RPH2-1SA3


RPH2-2A3 RPH2-2SI RPH2-2SA0 RPH2-2SA1 RPH2-2SA3

RPH2-1SIA0 RPH2-1SIA1 RPH2-1SIA3


RPH2-2SIA0 RPH2-2SIA1 RPH2-2SIA3

2.4. Elements on the front of the device


The device identification is located on the right side of the grip rail. The top line shows
the model variation code and the serial number is located on the line beneath.
With any queries or questions please state both numbers.

2.4.1. Graphic display


To show the adjusted and measured values.
The top line shows each active menu point. Underneath four menu lines appear. The
last line (under the drawn line) is the status line. The feed in or measured values appear
here.
The digits which are pressed into the front panel underneath the display indicate the
positions for setting the alarms.

Sys t em Da t a
> Pa s swo r d
Sy s t em F r e q u e n c y
Co n t r o l Vo l t a g e
Ra t ed Pr essu r e
00 0 0
12345 6 78
L1 L2 L 3

2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display


Turn key-operated switch to „OFF“.
Press the [Enter] button and hold it.
Turn the key-operated switch to „OPERATION“.
The contrast changes within its limits from dark to light.
When the optimal contrast for your requirements is reached, release the [Enter] button.

Page 10
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Note: The whole contrast-range of the display is adjustable. Therefore the display
becomes nearly transparent or dark respectively for a moment. The selected contrast is
stored in a non-volatile memory.

2.4.2. Key-operated switch

2.4.2.1. Position "OFF"


The RPH2 is blocked. No switching operation is possible. The green LED "READY" is
extinguished and the alarm contact "Device not Ready" (-X6: 12/13) closes.

2.4.2.2. Position "OPERATION"


After switching to this position the device carries out an internal test. After the averaging
of the analogue measured values (pressure, temperature, control voltage) is completed
(it takes approx. 20 sec.) and no failure is present, the device switches to "OPERATION"
and the green LED "READY" lights up. The alarm contact "Device not ready" (-X6:
12/13) opens.

2.4.3. LED indicators

2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green)


Status Function
Steady light The device is ready for operation

Dark Key-operated switch in "OFF" position


Averaging of analogue measured values is still not
completed (see 1.2) Voltage reference is missing or
frequency is not in the permitted range (±10 %)
The device has identified an internal failure.

Blinking The password is activated, the device can be


parameterized. All functions are active.

2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red)
To show the parameterized alarms. The LED's are assigned to the alarm relays 1 to 7.
Next to the LED's is a window in which the user's message texts can be placed. For a
withdrawn cassette, the input tag with the texts is inserted from the top behind the front.
As insert use a sheet of paper 41 mm x 90 mm.

Status Function
Steady light An alarm has occurred. The LED remains alight until
the alarm is active (regardless of whether the "Quitt"
button has been pressed). As long as the LED is
alight, the affiliated output relay is also activated.

Page 11
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Status Function
Blinking An alarm has occurred which is marked as „Rest
obligatory“
After pressing the "Quitt" button two possibilities arise:
1) The LED extinguishes, i.e. the alarm was no
longer active when reseted, the output relay is released.
2) The indicator switches over to permanent light, i.e.
the alarm is still active, the output relay remains
energized.
As long as the LED is alight or blinks, the affiliated output relay is energized.

2.4.4. Keys
[Enter] Menu point open / confirm
[+] Cursor up / increase value
[-] Cursor down / decrease value
[Esc] Leave menu point / break-off action
[Quitt] Acknowledge alarm / alter current scale (together with [+] or [-])

2.4.5. Serial interface


To connect the RPH2 to a computer via a standard interface cable.
Pinning of connection cable (Nullmodem Cable):

PC Serial Port RPH2 Serial Port PC Serial Port RPH2 Serial Port

1 1 1 1

9 pin plug 9 pin plug 25 pin plug 9 pin plug

2.5. Menu system


The user surface is organized in several master menu points, each with linked sub-
menu points. For their part, the sub-menus can contain further sub-menus. The last
line (under the drawn line) is the status line. Adjusted or measured values are shown
here.
The menu structure depends on the RPH2 configuration, e.g. with a device without a
current measuring module (option I) menu points are not available which are
connected with his function. There are menu cells which can only be read and others
where an alteration to the setting can be carried out.

Changes are only possible after the password has been activated.

After feeding the auxiliary voltage, the first four lines of the master menu (1st plane)
appear on the display. Move the menu cursor (black triangle on the left side of the

Page 12
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
display) up and down using the [+] an[-] keys. The first four lines of the 2nd plane are
shown after pressing [Enter]. Analogues are also valid for the 3rd plane. The menu
cursor is moved again using [+] or [-]. The contents of the cells are shown in the status
line. If a value is to be altered, move the menu cursor to the desired plane and line.
After pressing [Enter], a blinking cursor appears under the first status line position.
Change this position using [+] or [-]. [Enter] moves the cursor right to the next position.

With [Esc] the input mode can be left at any time without storing the changes made.

After feeding in the last position the message


Accept: YES - NO
appears in the status line.

The input is confirmed with [Enter]. The new value is stored and the menu cursor
appears. [Esc] enables the input procedure to be repeated.

After completing the input, turn the key-operated switch to "OFF" and then to
"OPERATION" or start the selftest via the menu. After the selftest the data in the
system is accepted.
The following pages show a list of all the available menu points. The cross-references
to the chapter with the detailed function description are in the column "Chapt.".
The column "Module" shows with which model variation this menu is available.
The following coding system applies:
-1 RPH2 with one switching function
-2 RPH2 with two switching functions
Ax Analogue module in all models with module A
A1 Analogue module, e.g. Option 1
I Current measuring module Option I
S Signal module Option S

Menu points without a particular task are available on all models.

Page 13
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
2.5.1. Menu structure

Chapter Module Level 1 Level 2 Level 3


5.1 System Data
5.1.1 Password
5.1.2 System Frequency
5.1.3 Ax Control Voltage
5.1.4 Ax Rated Pressure
5.1.5. Switching Program
5.1.5.1 User Program
5.1.6 -1 Function CH1
5.1.7 Language
5.1.8 Time/Date
5.1.9 New Password
5.1.10 Selftest Start
5.1.11 Selftest Interval

5.2 CB Data
5.2.1 Operating Time CH1
5.2.2 Operating Time CH2
5.2.3 Arcing Time CH1
5.2.4 Arcing Time CH2
5.2.5 S Aux.Timeshift CH1
5.2.6 S Aux.Timeshift CH2
5.2.7 SAx Adaptive Control ->
5.2.7.1 SAx Weighting Factor
5.2.7.2 SAx Adaptive Times CH1
5.2.7.3 SAx Adaptive Times CH2
5.2.7.4 SAx Reset Adaptive Times
5.2.8 Ax Compensation
5.2.9 Ax kU1 Voltage CH1
5.2.10 A1,A3 kP1 Pressure CH1
5.2.11 Ax Temp. Comp. CH1
5.2.12 Ax Table Temp. CH1 ->
5.2.12.1 Ax Delta_t xx°C
5.2.13 Ax kU2 Voltage CH2
5.2.14 A1,A3 kP2 Pressure CH2
5.2.15 Ax Temp. Comp. CH2
5.2.16 Ax Table Temp. CH2 ->
5.2.16.1 Ax Delta_t xx°C
5.3 Analogue Data
5.3.1 Thresholds
5.3.1.1 I Current max (peak)
5.3.1.2 Ax Control Voltage max
5.3.1.3 Ax Control Voltage min
5.3.1.4 Ax Temperature max
5.3.1.5 Ax Temperature min
5.3.1.6 A1,A3 Pressure max
5.3.1.7 A1,A3 Pressure min
5.3.2 I Rated Curr. prim
5.3.3 I Rated Curr. sec

Page 14
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Chapter Module Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Analogue Data (contin.)
5.3.4 Ax Actual Contr. Voltage
5.3.5 Ax Temperature
5.3.5.1 Ax Value at 4 mA
5.3.5.2 Ax Value at 20 mA
5.3.6 A1,A3 Pressure
5.3.6.1 A1,A3 Value at 4 mA
5.3.6.2 A1,A3 Value at 20 mA
5.4 Alarms
5.4.1 Reset obligatory
5.4.2 Lock-out
5.4.3 Alarm List
5.4.3.1 Lock-out
5.4.3.2 Frequency min
5.4.3.3 Frequency max
5.4.3.4 I Current max (peak)
5.4.3.5 Ref. Voltage Failure
5.4.3.6 S RTC Impulse Failure
5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate
5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded
5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated
5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR
5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR
5.4.3.12 -2 Selftest CH2 ERROR
5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min
5.4.3.14 -2 Command Time CH2 min
5.4.3.15 S Operating Time min
5.4.3.16 S Operating Time max
5.4.3.17 S Drive Mech. Failure
5.4.3.18 Archive Full
5.4.3.19 Archive Failure
5.4.3.20 Ax Control Voltage min
5.4.3.21 Ax Control Voltage max
5.4.3.22 Ax Temperature min
5.4.3.23 Ax Temperature max
5.4.3.24 Ax Temp. Transd. Fault
5.4.3.25 A1,A3 Pressure min
5.4.2.26 A1,A3 Pressure max
5.4.3.27 A1,A3 Pressure Transd. Fault
5.5 Measurement
5.5.1 I Current Graphs
5.5.2 Measured Times
5.5.2.1 Command OUT
5.5.2.2 S CB Signal received
5.5.2.3 Ax Calculated Op. Time
5.5.2.4 S Measured Op. Time
5.5.3 Frequency
5.5.4 I Current (RMS)
5.5.5 Ax Control Voltage

Page 15
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Chapter Module Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Measurement (contin.)
5.5.6 Ax Temperature
5.5.7 Ax Temperature f. Comp
5.5.8 Ax Additional Op. Times
5.5.8.1 Ax Voltage CH1
5.5.8.2 Ax Voltage CH 2
5.5.8.3 Ax Temperature CH1
5.5.8.4 Ax Temperature CH2
5.5.8.5 A1,A3 Pressure CH1
5.5.8.6 A1,A3 Pressure CH2
5.5.9 A3 Pressure (L1/L2/L3)
5.5.10 A1 Pressure (L1)
5.6 Aux. Functions
5.6.1 S Alarm Output
5.6.2 S Alarm Input
5.6.3 Error Type
5.7 Switching Archive

3. APPLICATION NOTES

3.1. General Description of the Functions


The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is a three-phase control device for circuit
breakers with single pole drives. It can be used for both the energizing and de-
energizing of high voltage devices.

3.1.1. Synchronized switching

3.1.1.1. Closing
Energizing of transformers, reactors and capacitors is normally effected three-pole - for
all 3 phases simultaneously. In doing this the point on wave is left up to chance. If
closing is carried out in this manner, high inrush currents with high DC components are
unavoidable. When energizing capacitors additional high switching surges can occur.
The results are unwanted operation of protection devices and repercussions on
machines and network.

The inrush currents and switching surges can be reduced to an acceptable rate by
installing closing resistors at the circuit breaker. The costs for such closing resistors are
very high, due to the mechanical expenditure. Besides, the necessarily high energetic
absorbtivity of the resistor material sets relatively restricted limits of practicability.

By selecting a suitable switching time the physical causes of these high inrush currents
can be counteracted. This possibility is effected through synchronized switching with the
RPH2. This enables the three poles of a circuit breaker to be controlled independently.

Page 16
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
3.1.1.2. Opening
The de-energizing of shunt reactors is a critical process liable to generate re-ignitions
between circuit breaker contacts. This means very high stress for the insulation of both
the shunt reactor and the circuit breaker.

If the contact separation takes place a sufficient amount of time before the current zero
crossing through suitable circuit breaker control, to ensure a gap capable of
withstanding the transient recovery voltage at interruption.

3.1.2. Circuit breaker


The mechanical closing time of the circuit breaker is defined as the time between the
electrical command to the operating coil and touching of the main contacts.

On the other hand, the opening time is the time between the electrical command and the
separation of the main contacts. The operating times of circuit breakers, independent of
the breaking system and the type of operating mechanism, changes in dependence on
certain service parameters:

· With reduced control voltage at the operating coil there is less energy available to
change the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operating
time extends itself. (Valid for all types of operating drives.)

· By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carry
out the switching movement changes.

· The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electrical
resistance of the operating coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gas
are all dependent on the temperature. Moreover, there is expansion of operating
rods and porcelains. All these parameters influence the operating time in different
ways.

In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by some
milliseconds. The RPH2 is in the position to compensate these operating time variations.

3.1.3. RPH2 structure


The outstanding features of the RPH2 are:

· Microprocessor control with a switching command time resolution of 0,1 ms.

· Large graphic display to show the adjusted and measured values ( in German,
English and French or user defined language)

· Easy setting via keypad or PC interface.

· Analogue module for measuring control voltage, pressure and temperature, for the
compensation of changes in operating time.

Page 17
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
· Current measuring function for the graphic display of the line currents during
switching.

· Extensive alarm functions

· Two switching functions (CLOSING and OPENING) with one device are possible.

· Switching programs with fixed switching times for the most frequent applications.

· A free program is available for special user-defined applications (e.g. switching


unloaded lines).

· Extensive archive function. The most important data for the last 1000 operations are
stored in a non-volatile memory and are available for diagnostic purposes.

· Comfortable PC software for setting and read-out archive data. All data can be
stored and printed out. If the user cannot find sufficiency with the three languages
mentioned previously, then the display can be translated into the user's national
language using PC software.

· Compact housing for flush mounting or wall mounting.

3.1.4. Function of the RPH2


The phase-synchronous trigger-signal is taken from the network voltage (phase L1). The
trigger-signal is based on the voltage-zeros of the reference voltage.
The network voltage is also used as a reference for circuit opening. The amount of
phase shift between current and voltage is almost always +90°el. or -90°el. (A deviation
of ±1°el. creates a variation of ±0,06 ms of the switching point.)
The controller's mode of operation shown below. The diagrams are only single-phased
and shown without transient effects which may possibly occur.

3.1.4.1. Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum (Fig. 1)


At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The next
voltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the given
operating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that current
starts at the required time (3). Through the unavoidable pre-arcing in the circuit breaker
pole the current begins before actually touching the contacts. Contact touching happens
at the pre-arcing time after the voltage maximum (optimum switching time). The required
pre-arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for all three phases. The two other phases
are controlled in the same (independent) manner.

Page 18
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Figure 1
2
System
voltage

3
Current

t_arc

1
CB-ON
command
t d CB operating time
to RPH2

Command
by RPH2

4
CB main
contact

t_arc...pre-arcing time of CB time


t_d... delay time of RPH2

3.1.4.2. Breaking of an inductive current


At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The next
voltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the given
operating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that contact
separation occurs at the required time (3). In the time between contact separation and
the following current zero crossing, the contacts have separated so far that after the
current breaking in the zero crossing (4),an adequate contact gap exists to withstand the
transient recovery voltage. The required arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for all
three phases. The two other phases are controlled in the same (independent) manner.

Figure 2
2
System
voltage

3
4
Current

t_arc
1
CB-OFF
command
t_d CB operating time
to RPH2

Command
by RPH2

CB main
contact

time
t_arc...arcing time of CB
t_d ...delay time of RPH2

Page 19
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Whether the system neutral is grounded or isolated, the RPH2 registers the signal
contacts of the neutral earthingswitch and automatically selects the correct switching
time.

3.1.4.3. Switching program


The RPH2 already has several preconfigured switching programs for various uses.
The treatment of the system neutral of the network is automatically taken into
consideration.
The trigger point for the switching times is the beginning of the period that is
determinated by the zero crossing of the voltage L1-N (reference voltage). The given
delay times in table 1 are given in milliseconds after the trigger point. They show the
moment where current flow begins or ends (point (4) in figures 1 and 2). The RPH2
automatically takes pre-arcing and breaking times into account.

The following programs are available:


· Transformer (transformer, transformer bank, three-core reactor)
· Reactor (reactor group)
· Capacitor bank
· Free program

The following table is based on a phase sequence of the network of


L1= reference L2= reference - 120° L3= reference - 240°

Table 1: Delay times of the various switching programs.


Switching programs Neutral Operation Delay time
L1 L2 L3
Transformer GROUNDED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)
OPENING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)
ISOLATED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 0 0
OPENING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)
Reactor GROUNDED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)
OPENING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)
ISOLATED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 0 0
OPENING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)
Capacitor GROUNDED CLOSING 0 6.7 (5.6) 3.3 (2.8)
OPENING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)
ISOLATED CLOSING 10 (8.3) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2)
OPENING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)
Values in () for 60 Hz.
The free program enables the user to select whatever switching time for both switching
functions (if available) and for both types of neutral treatment.

3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors


For this switching task select the program "Transformer" in the menu [System Data]
[Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.

For transformers with primary windings in delta connection the program for isolated
neutral must be used (short circuit the terminals -X6:8 with -X8:11 of the RPH2).

Page 20
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
3.2.1. Closing

3.2.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral


Circuit breaker closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transient
processes. With earthed-neutral networks the obvious thing to do would be to switch
offset the three phases L1, L2 and L3 in their respective voltage peak, i.e. timewise
each one about a third of the period. Due to the mutual coupling of the individual phases
(via the iron core in three-core transformers or via the low-voltage winding in transformer
banks) this switching sequence did not have the desired effect. The first phase L1 is
closed in the voltage peak (a quarter period after the voltage zero crossing of the
reference voltage L1-N). Because the first phase is laid to nominal voltage, the flux in
the relevant core rises also to its nominal value. This flux closes via both the remaining,
non-generated cores, to each a half. If closing of the two remaining phases occurs a
quarter period after the first, current flow can start immediately and without transient
process (switching sequence L1-L2+L3).

3.2.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral


With an isolated neutral, closing of one phase makes no sense. Two phases must be
closed first (L2 and L3) and the obvious thing to do would be to select for the switching
time the voltage peak of the phase to phase voltage (i.e. zero crossing of the reference
voltage L1-N). Switching on the third phase occurs about a quarter period later, at the
peak of voltage L1 (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).

3.2.2. Opening
For switching off transformers and three leg reactors with the RPH2, please read point
3.3.2 "Switching off Reactor Groups".

3.2.3. Data on circuit breaker required


The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:

The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles
(see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms.

3.2.3.1. Closing
For closing at the correct time, the pre-arcing time of the breaker at the closing voltage
(see table 2) according to the phases and the treatment of the system neutral.

Table 2: Closing Voltage (Un= system voltage (rms.))


Phase Neutral Grounded Neutral Isolated
L1 Ö(2/3)*Un 1.5*Ö(2/3)*Un
L2 ½*Ö2*Un ½*Ö2*Un
L3 ½*Ö2*Un ½*Ö2*Un

If the exact value cannot be obtained from the breaker manufacturer, the optimum
closing time can be determined through switching tests with oscillographical
measurements of the inrush currents. For RPH2 with option I, the inrush currents are
directly shown by the device (curve course and peak value). For the tests it is advisable

Page 21
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
to begin with an assumed pre-arcing time of 3 ms at Ö(2/3)*Un, 2.5 ms at ½*Ö2*Un and
4.5 ms at 1.5*Ö(2/3)*Un.

3.2.3.2. Opening
Data of the optimum arcing time in order to guarantee a sure current breaking in the
next zero crossing.
See 3.3.3 for further information

3.2.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy


With regard to the accuracy of the switching time, closing in the voltage peak is not so
critical. By closing at 1 ms before or after the peak, the voltage still amounts to 95 % of
the peak value, at 2 ms at least 81 % (valid for 50 Hz).
Therefore an accuracy of ±2 ms at 50 Hz or 60 Hz is sufficient.

See 3.3.4 for opening values

3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups


For this switching task select the program "Reactor" in the menu [System Data]
[Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.
If the RPH2 is only to be used for opening, then this program can also be used to
switch three core reactors (switching moments are identical to the transformer
program).

3.3.1. Closing

3.3.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral


Closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transient processes. With
grounded neutral networks the three phases L1, L2 and L3 are closed in their respective
voltage peak, i.e. timewise each one offset about a third of the period, as there is no
coupling between the phases (switching sequence L2-L1-L3).

3.3.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral


Closing runs according to the same principles as in the program for transformers (see
3.2.1.2).

3.3.2. Opening
Breaking of small inductive currents, as is with reactors, can lead to high switching
surges if current chopping or restriking in the circuit breaker occurs.
Contact separation should take place a sufficient time before current zero crossing so
that after current breaking the contact gap is great enough to withstand the recovery
voltage. The switching times given in table 1, indicate the moment of current breaking.
The necessary arcing window is taken into account by the RPH2 through the arcing
time.

3.3.3. Data on circuit breaker required


The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:

Page 22
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles
(see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms.

3.3.3.1. Closing
The pre-arcing times of the circuit breaker must be known.
· Pre-arcing time of the breaker in the voltage peak: equal value for all three phases
with grounded neutral or for phase L1 with isolated neutral.
· Pre-arcing time with partial voltage: for phases L2 and L3 with isolated neutral (see
table 2)

3.3.3.2. Opening
The optimum arcing time input determines the arcing window for a secure current
breaking, free from restrikes, in the next zero crossing. The value is given by the
breaker manufacturer.

In order not to come into conflict with unavoidable operating time tolerances, contact
separation should begin 1,5 ms after zero crossing at the earliest, i.e. do not select an
arcing time of longer than 8,5 ms (6,8 ms at 60 Hz). About a quarter period as arcing
time is regarded as standard time.

3.3.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy


For circuit breaker closing, point 3.2.4 applies (standard value ±2 ms).

For circuit breaker opening, the breaker should achieve an operating time accuracy
of ±1,5 ms.

3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors


For this switching task select the program "Capacitor" in the menu [System Data]
[Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.

3.4.1. Closing
High inrush currents and high voltage surges can occur with the random switching of
capacitors, especially if switching takes place in the voltage peak. The effects of parallel
switching of capacitors is particularly serious. Particularly high voltage surges can occur,
due to reflections at the end of radial networks.

3.4.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral


Closing takes place in the voltage zero crossing of the related phase-to earth voltage,
i.e. all phases offset one third of the period (switching sequence L1-L3-L2).

3.4.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral


As a unipolar switching makes no sense, two phases are simultaneously closed in the
voltage zero crossing of their phase to phase voltage. The third phase follows a quarter
period later (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).

Page 23
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
3.4.2. Opening
In general, breaking of capacitive currents represents no problem for modern circuit
breakers. If the RPH2 is used for the synchronized switching of capacitor banks, then
the same applies as in 3.3.2, i.e. contact separation in sufficient time before voltage zero
crossing.

3.4.3. Data on circuit breaker required


The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:

The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three poles (see 3.1.2 for
definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms.

In order to achieve the necessary accuracy when closing in the voltage zero crossing,
the rate of fall of the withstand voltage (dUd/dt) of the breaker should be greater than
the rate of change of the gap voltage at voltage zero (dU/dt). Figure 3 shows three
possible cases.

1 The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is less than the rate of
fall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt < dU/dt, k<1.
The breaker can be used for this application if dUd/dt > 0.8*dU/dt. In this case
please contact the manufacturer of the breaker for calculation of the pre-arcing
times.

2 The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is equal to the rate of
fall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt = dU/dt, k=1.

3 The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is greater than the rate
of fall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt > dU/dt, k>1.

Figure 3

1 2 3
u

1 interrupter dielectric strength lower than dU/dt of system voltage


2 interrupter dielectric strength equal dU/dt of system voltage
3 interrupter dielectric strength greater than dU/dt of system voltage

Page 24
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
However, some pre-arcing may be inevitable due to variations in the closing time and
the spread in dielectric withstand. To minimise energizing transients, the closing should
aim at an instant, td, after the voltage zero (the RPH2 takes this into account through a
given arcing time). If data is not available from the breaker manufacturer, the pre-
arcing time can be approximated. Modern breakers have closing contact speeds of
typical 5 m/s and a dielectric strength of more than 20 kV/mm. That results in a fall rate
(dUd/dt) of more than 100 kV/ms.

Figure 4 shows the voltage across the open contact gap and the withstand voltage fall
with varying closing times. The arcing time ta is calculated so that the withstand
voltage is approx. the same value as the upper and lower operating time tolerance.

Figure 4

Ud

Up

ta
t
T T
T1

voltage across the open contact gap and withstand voltage


fall with varying closing time T 1±DT

The RPH2 arcing time setting can be calculated according to the following formulas.
Take note of the differing arcing times with isolated neutrals. The calculations must be
verified by switching tests.

Page 25
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Note: The system voltage in the following formulas is related to one interrupting
chamber of the circuit breaker, take care in case of breakers with multiple interrupting
chambers!
The voltage across one interrupting chamber is calculated as follows where "m" is the
number of interrupting chambers of one pole:

1.05 m-1
Un = U system × Un... Voltage for one interrupting chamber
m

Un [kV] system voltage (rms) for one interrupting chamber


2
u'= Un × [kV] peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles
3
2
u'= Un × [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the two
2
first poles L2 and L3
2
u'=1.5× Un × [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the last
3
pole L1
dU 1
= u'×w × [kV/ ms] rateof fall of system voltage
dt 1000
dUd
[kV/ ms] rate of fall of CB withstand voltage
dt
æ dUdö
ç ÷
è dt ø
= k [p.u.] see figure 3
æ dUö
ç ÷
è dt ø
D T [ms] variation of CB closing time
DT
sin(w × )
ta = 1000 ×1000 [ms] prearcing time set to RPH2
w×k
DT
Up = sin(w × ) × u [kV] prearcing voltage
1000

The following example demonstrates the calculation for the pre-arcing time for each
pole with various system neutral treatments.

Page 26
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Example:

Un = 145 [kV] system voltage (rms)


u' = 118.4 [kV] peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles
u' = 102.5 [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the two
first poles L2 and L3
u' = 177.6 [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the last pole L1
dU
= 37.2 [kV / ms] rate of fall of system voltage, neutral grounded
dt
dU
= 32.2 [kV / ms] rate of fall of system voltage, neutral isolated
dt
(for the two first poles L2 and L3)
dU
= 558
. [kV / ms] rate of fall of system voltage, neutral isolated
dt
(for the last pole L1)
dUd
= 100 [kV / ms] rate of fall of CB withstand voltage
dt
k = 2.7 [p. u.] neutral grounded, for L1, L2, L3
k = 3.1 [p. u.] neutral isolated, for L2, L3
k = 1.8 [p. u.] neutral isolated, for L1
DT = ±1 [ms] variation of CB closing time
ta = 0.4 [ms] neutral grounded, prearcing time set to RPH2
for all poles
ta = 0.3 [ms] neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2
for poles L2 and L3
ta = 0.5 [ms] neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2
for pole L1

3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy


Capacitor energizing places the greatest demands on the breaker in reference to
operating time constancy. Every variation from the required switching time leads to a
higher withstand voltage value which causes greater surges and inrush currents.
Closing time variation should amount to ± 1 ms at the most. When this accuracy
cannot be maintained under all conditions, we recommend the use of the analogue
module option A to correct the operating time influences.

For closing, the switch should reach a operating time accuracy of ± 1,5 ms.

Page 27
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
3.5 Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines
Uncharged high voltage lines are to be fundamentally treated like capacitors. Due to
the inter-phase coupling the switching moments are not the same as for capacitor
banks. The RPH2 can also be used for auto-reclosing of uncompensated lines
equipped with inductive potential transformers. During the auto-reclose dead-time the
trapped charges on the line must be fully discharged by the inductive potential
transformers!

Whether the system neutral is earthed or isolated does not effect the switching
moments.

The RPH2 must be set to the [User Program] with the following settings (see also
5.1.5.1).

For [T_C1 Neutral isolated] and for [T_C1 Neutral grounded] the same values must be
set:

50 Hz:
L1 = 0 ms
L2 = 7.3 ms
L3 = 13.3 ms

60 Hz:
L1 = 0 ms
L2 = 6.1 ms
L3 = 11.1 ms

Page 28
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
4 FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES

4.1 Signal Module: Option S

4.1.1 Alarm outputs


The module offers additional outlets (alarm 2 to 7). Each alarm contact corresponds
with the associated indicator-LED (LED 2 to 7) at the front. The allocation of the alarm
functions to the output contacts is user-defined. Many alarm functions can be laid to
one output. The procedure is described in chapter 5.

4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs


Opto coupler inputs with pre-defined functions are available.

4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time


Three inputs serve to measure the operating time of the three poles via their auxiliary
contacts. (Resolution 0,5 ms). The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts signalling (contact
52a) works with an internal RPH2 voltage (48 VDC), i.e. potential-free contacts are
necessary. The necessary wiring is to be carried out according to the accompanying
wiring diagram.

Figure 5

CB main closing
contact
CB aux. -Dt
contact

CB main opening
contact
CB aux. Dt
contact
time

To compensate the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contacts of
the breaker poles, the possibility exists to feed in a compensation time in order to
maintain the operating time as real value on the display and in the archives. Figure 5
shows the correlation as an example. If the auxiliary contact closes after the main
contact then the compensation time value. Dt is negative, if the auxiliary contact opens
before the main contact then a positive value results. If no possibility exists to measure
the time shift of the auxiliary contacts, this value can also be determined via the RPH2
within the time release limits.
Conditions:
· The pole operating times given by the manufacturer are correctly fed in (see 5.1
and 5.2)

Page 29
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
· The environmental conditions correspond approx. to the conditions when measuring
the pole operating times in the factory. With strong deviations in the environmental
conditions, the pole operating times must be measured again on site.
· The RPH2 compensating function is deactivated (see 5.6).
· The circuit breaker can be operated repeatedly without load (with opened busbar
disconnector.

Operate the circuit breaker via the RPH2 with channel 1.

Change to the menu [Measurement] / [Measured Times].


In the menu [Measured Op. Times] (Figure 6) the measured pole operating times
appear in the status line, including the main contact/auxiliary contact time shift.

Figure 6

Me a s u r d T i me s
Pole operating times:
C o mm a n d OUT
CB S i g na l Re c e i v ed
Ca l c u l at e d Op . T i me s L1 = 139.3 ms
> Me a s u r ed Op . T i me L2 = 138.7 ms
146 . 5 1 45 . 6 14 6 . 1ms L3 = 139.6 ms
12345 678
L1 L2 L 3

The value for "H-contact SK1 Diff" for every pole is calculated with:

[Aux. Timeshift CH1] = [Pole operating time] - [Measured Op. Time]

The input values in figure 7 are calculated with the values form figure 6 and .the values
of the pole operating times.

Figure 7

CB D a t a - >
A r c i n g T i me CH 1
A r c i n g T i me CH 2
> A u x . T i me s h i f t CH 1
A u x . T i me s h i f t CH 2
- 7 . 2 - 6 . 9 - 6 . 5ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

Because the operating times are measured with a resolution of 0,5 ms, it is possibly
necessary to constitute the average value from several switching operations. Feed in
the determined values under [CB Data] / [Aux. Timeshift CH1] (figure 7) and check the
measured operating times as described above. A further compensation is possibly
necessary.

Page 30
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Check in all cases that the measured operating time corresponds with actual operating
times of the circuit breaker. This is essential for using the function of the adaptive
control !

For devices with two switching functions (RPH2-2), repeat the procedure for the
second switching channel too.

4.1.2.2 Remote reset


An input for remote reset is available. A potential-free contact (closer) is necessary as
control device. Drive takes place with the RPH2 intern 48 VDC voltage.

4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization


A further input is for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be parallel switched with
other synchronized control devices. A potential-free contact is necessary.

4.2 Analogue Module: Option A


With this module the influence of environmental parameters on the pole operating time
can be compensated. External sensors are necessary for pressure and temperature
measurement. Control voltage, pressure and temperature are continually measured.
The voltage and pressure values are immediately available for the calculation of
compensation times. The shown vales in the menus [Measured value/Control voltage]
and [Measured value/Pressure] are the basic calculating factors.
An average value formation is carried out for temperature compensation.
Update takes place every two hours. The stored temperature value is compared with
the measured value and the stored temperature is compensated by half the difference
(figure 8). In the menu [Measured value/Temperature] the actual measured
temperature is shown, in the menu [Measured value/Temperature f. Comp.] the
average is shown which is effective for compensation.

Figure 8

ambient temperature

temperature for compensation

Page 31
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
In the menu [Measured value/Compensation] each of the actual additional times are
shown. After the key-operated switch is turned form "OFF" to "OPERATION", the
RPH2 carries out an automatic check and all analogue measured values for
compensation are set at the actual measured value.

4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation


Measuring the control voltage is done internally in the RPH2 and no additional
equipment is necessary. The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time
compensation according to a function with an open parameter. By fixing these
parameters the compensation function can be suited to the character of the power
switch. Calculation for opening and closing takes place separately. The parameter kU1
works for switching channel 1, kU2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2
switching functions). If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no additional times
are calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked. Fixing the
compensation parameters takes place through calculation or with the assistance of the
accompanying PC Software.

Two breaker characteristic measured points are required to calculate the


compensation function:
· One point with nominal conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of one
pole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is the
manufacturer value for pole operating time.
· A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time of
the same pole with rated pressure, rated temperature and reduced control voltage.
Figure 9 shows an example of a circuit breaker opening:

Value 1 (with nominal conditions):


U1 = 220 VDC Rated control voltage
t1 = 27.0 ms Pole operating time with nominal conditions
Value 2:
U2 = 180 VDC Reduced control voltage
t2 = 29.2 ms Pole operating time with control voltage U2

Figure 9

32
Function calculated by RPH2

31

30
Value 2
Operating Time [ms]

(U2/t2)
29

28

27
Value 1
(U1/t1)
26
140 160 180 200 220 240
Operating Voltage [V]

Page 32
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
The compensation parameter kU can be calculated using the following formula:

Value 1:
U1 [V] rated control voltage
t1 [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions
Value 2:
U2 [V] reduced control voltage
t2 [ms] CB operating time with U2

(t2 - t1) × 100


kU = drive mechanism parameter
U1
( - 1) × t1
U2

The input from above results in a compensation parameter kU = 36.6

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kU1 and kU2 is to be
carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

4.2.2 Temperature Compensation


An external sensor with integrated transducer (2 conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC)
and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) is necessary for measuring the temperature.
The transducer supply is effected through the RPH2. Up to eight RPH2's can be
parallel switched to one temperature transducer. See the connection plan 58.010.111-
xx also.

The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according
to a piecewise linear function with one control point every 10 °C in the range of -50 °C
and +50 °C. So all kinds of temperature functions of the circuit breaker (from linear to
exponential) can be set to the RPH2. The measured values can be entered in the table
in figure 10. The line Delta_t = 0 ms defines the nominal operating time of the circuit
breaker under normal conditions. The values of Delta_t at different ambient
temperatures are the differences of the measured operating times to the nominal
operating time. The 11 values of Delta_t(T) (T = -50 °C to +50 °C) must be set to the
RPH2.

In the example in figure 11 the procedure is shown. The measured values are marked
by squares. Connect the points by lines end eventually extend the lines to the
extremes (dotted line in the example). Evaluate the values of Delta_t(T) at the control
points (-50 °C to +50 °C) so to get the 11 values for Delta_t(T) shown in the table in
figure 11.

By using the PC software "RPH2- Tool" also an exponential function with one open
parameter can be calculated. Especially for circuit breakers with spring drive
mechanism this option will be useful.

Page 33
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Figure 10

Delta_t [ms]

Ambint Temperature [°C]

Page 34
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Figure 11

Delta_t [ms]

Temperature Delta_t
-50 °C 13.0 ms
-40 °C 9.0 ms
-30 °C 5.0 ms
-20 °C 2.5 ms
-10 °C 1.6 ms
0 °C 0.8 ms
+10 °C 0.4 ms
+20 °C 0.0 ms
+30 °C -0.2 ms
+40 °C -0.4 ms
+50 °C -1.0 ms

measured values

Ambient Temperature [°C]

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the evaluation of Delta_t(T) has to be
carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation


There are two module models available for measuring pressure:
· Option A1: for breakers with a mutual hydraulic system for all three poles
· Option A3: for breakers with separate hydraulic systems for each pole

One (Option A1) or three (Option A3) external sensors with integrated transducer (2
conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) are
necessary for measuring hydraulic pressure. The transducer supply is effected through
the RPH2.

Page 35
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according
to a function with one open parameter. By fixing this parameter, the compensation
function can be suited to the character of the circuit breaker. Calculation for opening
and closing takes place separately. The parameter kP1 works for switching channel 1,
kP2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2 switching functions). For the model
with option A3 with pressure measuring per pole only a compensation parameter for
each of the three poles is fed in. If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no
additional times are calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked.
Fixing the compensation parameters takes place through calculation or with the
assistance of the accompanying PC Software.

Two measuring points of the switching characteristic analogue for 4.2.1 are required to
calculate the equalising curve:
· One point with rated conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of one
pole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is the
manufacturer value for pole operating time.
· A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time of
the same pole with rated control voltage, rated temperature and reduced hydraulic
pressure.

Example:
Value 1 (with nominal conditions):
P1 = 265 bar Rated pressure
t1 = 110.5 ms Pole operating time with nominal conditions
Value 2:
P2 = 200 bar Reduced pressure
t2 = 127.7 ms Pole operating time with pressure P2

The compensation parameters kP can be calculated using the following formula.

Value 1:
P1 [V] rated hydraulic pressure
t1 [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions
Value 2:
P2 [V] reduced hydraulic pressure
t2 [ms] CB operating time with P2

(t2 - t1) × 100


kP = drive mechanism parameter
P1
( - 1) × t1
P2

The input from above results in a compensation parameter kP = 47.9.

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kP1 and kP2 is to be
carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

Page 36
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
4.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors
For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducer
are necessary which are not part of the delivery.

The integrated transducers must meet the following requirements:

Auxiliary voltage 24 VDC (supplied by the RPH2)


2 conductor system
Output signal 4 mA to 20 mA

Such transducers can be obtained from many manufacturers. The measuring range of
the sensors adjust itself to the respective requirements.
However, unnecessarily large measuring ranges reduce the measuring accuracy of the
RPH2. The RPH2 measuring input is adapted to the measuring range of the sensor
through parameterisation.

Transducer installation is carried out according to the manufacturer's guidelines.


Likewise, the connection cables to the RPH2 must be selected according to the
manufacturer's information. If no information is available, we recommend a shielded
two-wire cable per transducer, or at least a twisted pair of wires.

4.2.5 Adaptive Control


RPH2 with analogue module A and signal module S provide the additional feature of an
adaptive control to compensate the long time drift in operating time of the CB drive. The
actual operating times of the poles are measured by the signal module. A weighting
factor in the range of 0 to 0.5, step 0.05 (0 = function is disabled) is used for controlling
this function. A fraction (depending on the weighting factor) of the time difference
between the operating time of the last operation and the operation before is added to
the actual operating time. Additional operating times due to compensation functions are
not taken into consideration, so the pure long time drift of the drive mechanism is
compensated. The additional adaptive times are displayed and a function is available to
reset these times.

The compensation of the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contacts
of the breaker poles must be done very exactly to avoid errors in measuring of the
actual operating times.

· Time deviations of the measured values greater than 10 ms are not considered. (no
operation of the CB or incorrect measurement of operating times).
· Additional adaptive time is limited to 1 ms from one operation to the next.
· If the operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away from the pre-set
operating times for more than
±5 ms for opening
±10 ms for closing
the alarm "Drive mech. Failure" is generated.

The value of the weighting factor depends on the type of drive mechanism. We propose
a value of 0.25 to 0.30 for all types of mechanism.

Page 37
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
4.3 Current Module Option I
A current measuring module is available to make the switching of large transformers
and reactors easy when putting the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller into operation.
With this the inrush current can be recorded and graphically displayed during the
switching process. Data for the last 4 switching operations are stored in a non-volatile
memory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values are shown after feeding in
the current transformer current ratio.

For every phase there is an input for each 1 A and 5 A available. Because the current
inputs have a short time withstand of 100 xln, current measurement can be carried out
over a measuring core as well as a protection core of the current transformer.

Page 38
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
5 RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM

5.1 System data


- - RPH2 - 2 S I A 3 - -
> S y s t em D a t a
CB Da t a
Ana l og Da t a
A l a rms

12345678
L1 L2 L3

Enter + - Esc

5.1.1 Password
The factory-setting of the-password is "0000". To activate the password you must
change to the submenu [System Data/Password]. The actual status (‘active’ or ‘off’) is
shown in the bottom-left corner of the display. Type in the correct password and confirm
the assumption by pressing the ‘Enter’-button (see chapter 2.5). The display shows
‘active’ and the green LED ‘ready’ starts blinking if the password is correct (see chapter
2.4.3.1).
The password will be deactivated automatically if no button is pressed for more than 90
seconds.

Sy s t em D a t a
> P a s swo r d
S y s t em F r equ e n c y
C o n t r o l Vo l t a g e
R a t ed P r e s s u r e
0 0 0 0
1234 5 6 78
L1 L2 L 3

5.1.2 System Frequency


After activating this function by pressing the ‘Enter’-button you can choose any item of
the list by pressing the ‘+’- or the ‘-’-button (see chapter 2.5).

Available items: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 16 2/3 Hz

Page 39
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Sy s t em D a t a
P a s swo r d
> S y s t em F r equen c y
C o n t r o l Vo l t age
R a t ed P r e s s u r e
50 H z
12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.1.3 Control Voltage


Type in the rated voltage of your CB-coil (available only for modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-
xxA1, RPH2-xxA3).
This value acts as base for the calculation of the additional compensation value of the
mechanical operating time of the CB.

Sy s t em D a t a
P a s swo r d
S y s t em F r equ e n c y
> C o n t r o l Vo l t a g e
R a t ed P r e s s u r e
2 3 0 , 0 V
1234 5 6 78
L1 L2 L 3

5.1.4 Rated Pressure


Type in the value of the rated pressure of the hydraulic system of your CB-drive
(available only for module RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3). This value acts as base for the
calculation of the compensation value of the operating time of the CB.

Sy s t em D a t a
Sy s t em F rn eque c y
Co n t r o l Vg o l t a e
> Ra t ed P r ee s s u r
Sw i t c h i n gg P r o r am
1 0ba r
123456 78
L1 L2 L3

5.1.5 Switching Program


Select the suitable switching program by pressing the ‘+’- or ‘-’-button:

· transformer
· shunt reactor
· capacitor bank
· user program

Page 40
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Sy s t em D a t a
Co n t r o l V o l t age
Ra t ed P r e s s u r e
> Sw i t c h i ng P r o g r am
La n guage
T r a n s f o rme r
1 2345678
L1 L2 L3

5.1.5.1 User Program

You can define your own switching moments for each phase by selecting the ‘User
Program’.

Note: If you select ‘user program’ you have to select the rated frequency first (see
chapter 5.2).

Adjustable switching moments:

T_C1 Neutral isolated:


Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 with isolated
neutral.

Us e r P r o g r am
> T _C 1 N e u t r . i so l a t e d
T _C 1 N e u t r . g ro u nde d
T _C 2 N e u t r . i so l a t e d
T _C 2 N e u t r . g ro u nde d
0 , 0 0 , 0 0 , 0ms
1 234 56 7 8
L1 L2 L3

T_C1 Neutral grounded:


Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 with
grounded neutral.

The following two submenus are available only for module RPH2-2xx (module with two
switching channels):

T_C2 Neutral isolated:


Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 with isolated
neutral.

T_C2 Neutral grounded:


Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 with
grounded neutral.

Page 41
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.1.6 Function Channel 1
For the module RPH2-1xxx you have to select whether if you use the RPH2 for closing
or opening of the CB.

5.1.7 Language
Select your preferred language.
Available languages:
· German
· English
· French
· User language

S y s t em D a t a
Ra t ed P r e s s u r e
Sw i t c h i n g P r o g r am
> Languag e
T i me / Da t e
Eng l i s h
12345678
L1 L2 L3

Note: You can load the menutext in any language with the RPH-Tool (PC-based
software). If there any problems with the loaded language file you can return to the
English menus: Turn the key-operated switch to "OFF", press the "Quitt" button and
meanwhile return the key-operated switch back to "OPERATION".

5.1.8 Time / Date


Type in the actual date and time. The format for date and time is:
”YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM”.

S y s t em D a t a
Sw i t c h i ng P r o g r am
Languag e
> T i me / Da t e
New Pa s swo r d
1996 - 12 - 0 6 17 : 51
12 345678
L1 L2 L3

Note: Type in only correct values for date and time.

Note: There are no problems with a date after 2000-01-01.

5.1.9 New Password


If you want to change the actual password simply type in the new password.
Possible values are all numbers between ‘0000’ and ‘9999’.

Page 42
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Sy s t em D a t a
L anguag e
T i me / Da t e
> N ew Pa s swo r d
S e l f t e s t S t a r t
0 0 00
1234 5 678
L1 L2 L 3

Note: If you have forgotten the selected password, you can ask for a temporary
password (call your local AREVA representative)

5.1.10 Selftest Start


You can activate the selftest-facility by pressing the ‘Enter’-button.

The selftest-facility checks the internal function of the module and the switching outputs.

S y s t em D a t a
T i me / Da t e
New Pa s swo r d
> Se l f t e s t S t a r t
Se l f t e s t I n t e r v a l
YES
12345678
L1 L2 L3

Note: You can activate the selftest with the key-operated-switch too (see chapter 2.4.2).

5.1.11 Selftest Interval


Type in the desired interval between the automatic selftests.

The possible range is from 0,0 hours (shortest interval is 0,1 hour = 6 minutes) to 500
hours. Choosing a value of 0,0 hours deactivates the automatic selftest-facility.

Sy s t em D a t a
T i me / Da t e
N ew Pa s swo r d
S e l f t e s t S t a r t
> S e l f t e s t I n t e r v a l
2 4 , 0 Hr
12345 678
L1 L2 L 3

In the menu [Aux. Functions][Error Type] the type errors are displayed (see 5.6.3).

Page 43
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.2 CB Data

5.2.1 Operating Time CH1


Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and a
temperature of 20 °C for switching channel 1.

The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 200 ms.

The switching function (closing or opening) for module RPH2-1xx depends on the
selection made in the submenu ‘Function Channel 1’. (see chapter 5.1.6).

Module RPH2-2xx uses channel 1 for closing of the CB.

CB D a t a
> Op e r a t i n g T i me CH 1
Op e r a t i n g T i me CH 2
A r c i n g T i me CH 1
A r c i n g T i me CH 2
0 , 0 0 , 0 0 , 0ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

Note 1: The value of the operating time for each phase of the CB depends on the type
and manufacturer of the CB. This value is part of the CB-documentation delivered with
your CB.

Note 2: The difference between 2 phases should be less than one period (20 ms for
50 Hz).

Note 3: For single-phase-CBs the values for all three phases must be the same.

5.2.2 Operating Time CH2


Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and a
temperature of 20 °C for switching channel 2. Channel 2 always is used for opening.

The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 200 ms.

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx.

5.2.3 Arcing Time CH1


Type in the arcing time for each phase of the CB (see chapter 3.2 to 3.4).

The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 50 ms.

Closing: Pre-arcing time of the CB. The closing of the main-contact happens after the
chosen switching moment.

Page 44
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Opening: Arcing time of the CB. The opening of the main-contact happens before the
zero-crossing of the current.

CB D a t a
Op e r a t i n g T i me CH 1
Op e r a t i n g T i me CH 2
> A r c i n g T i me CH 1
A r c i n g T i me CH 2
0 , 0 0 , 0 0 , 0ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.2.4 Arcing Time CH2


This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 except
that channel 2 always is used for opening.

5.2.5 Auxiliary Timeshift CH1


This value is used for compensating the time lag between the main-contact and the
auxiliary-contact of the CB (see chapter 4.1.2.1).

The permissible range is from -25,5 ms to +25,5 ms.

CB D a t a
A r c i n g T i me CH 1
A r c i n g T i me CH 2
> A u x . T i mes h i f t CH 1
A u x . T i mes h i f t CH 2
+ 0 , 0 +0, 0 + 0 , 0ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxS.

5.2.6 Auxiliary Timeshift CH2


This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 except
that channel 2 always is used for opening.

5.2.7 Adaptive Control


This menu opens a submenu for controlling the this function (see also 4.2.5)

CB Da t a
Au x . T i me s h i f t CH 2
> Adap t i v C o n t r o l - >
C omp e n s a t i on
kU1 V o l t a g e CH 1

12345678
L1 L2 L3

Page 45
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
This submenu and the following menus are available only with module RPH2-xSAx.

5.2.7.1 Weighting Factor


This factor defines the friction of time difference added to the operating time.

A d a p t i v Con t r o l
> W e i g h t i ng Fa c t o r
A d a p t i v e T i me s CH 1
A d a p t i v e T i me s CH 2
R e s e t Adap t i v e T i me
0 . 25
12345 678
L 1 L2 L 3

The permissible range is from 0.00 to 0.50 (step 0.05).


A value of 0.00 disables this function.

5.2.7.2 Adaptive Times CH1


Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 1 are displayed.

5.2.7.3 Adaptive Times CH2


Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 2 are displayed.

5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times


This function allows to reset the additional times due to adaptive control to zero. After
this, the RPH2 operates with the pre-set pole operating times.

5.2.8 Compensation
If you select ‘NO’ all compensation functions are blocked.
If you select ‘YES’ compensation is active (for description see chapter 4.2)

CB Da t a
Au x . T i me s h i f t CH 1
Au x . T i me s h i f t CH 2
> C omp e n s a t i on
kU1 V o l t a g e CH 1
YES
12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.2.9 kU1 Voltage CH1


Type in the calculated value for compensation of changes of the control voltage (see
chapter 4.2.1).

The permissible range is from 0,0 to 150,0.

Page 46
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
CB Da t a
Au x . T i me s h
i f t CH 2
C omp e n s a ton i
> kU1 V o l t a g
e CH 1
kP1 P r e s s u
r e CH 1
30 , 3
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.10 kP1 Pressure CH1


same as 5.2.9, but for pressure compensation for channel 1.

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.11 Temperature Compensation CH1


This submenu enables or disables the temperature compensation.

CB Da t a
k U 1 V o l t a g e CH 1
k P 1 P r e s u r e CH 1
> T emp . C omp . CH 1
T a b l e T emp . CH 1 - >
ON
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.12 Table Temp. CH1


This menu opens a submenu for setting the values for temperature compensation.

5.2.12.1 Delta_t xx°C


Here the 11 values of Delta_t(T) for defining the temperature compensation function can
be entered to the RPH2 (see also 4.2.2).

Ta b l e T emp 1. CH - >
D e l t a _ t -
°C 50
> D e l t a _ t -
°C 40
D e l t a _ t -
°C 30
D e l t a _ t -
°C 20
+5 . 3 ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

The permissible range for Delta_t is from -10.0 ms to +25.0 ms.

Page 47
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.2.13 kU2 Voltage CH2
same as 5.2.9, but for control voltage compensation for channel 2.

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.14 kP2 Pressure CH2


same as 5.2.10, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.15 Temperature Compensation CH2


same as 5.2.11, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.16 Table Temp. CH1


same as 5.2.12, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.

5.2.16.1 Delta_t xx°C


same as 5.2.12.1, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.

5.3 Analogue Data

5.3.1 Thresholds
The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH 2 obtained.
Exceeding of limit-settings cause an alarm, if set (see chapter 5.4).

Ana l og D a t a
> T r e s ho l d s - >
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p r im
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s e c
Ac t ua l C on t r . Vo l t age

12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.3.1.1 Current max.

Type in the allowed maximum value (peak-value) of the current during the switching
operation. If the current during a switching operation exceeds this limit an alarm is
generated.

The permissible range is from 0 A to 9999 A.

Page 48
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
T r e s h o l d s - >
> Cu r r e n t ma
( p x eak )
Op . V o l t ag
ma e x
Op . V o l t ag
m i e n
T emp e r a t u r
ma e x
50 0 A
123456 78
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is only available for module RPH2-xxI.

5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max.


Type in the upper limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the control
voltage becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V.

T r e s h o l d s - >
C u r r e n t ma x ( p eak )
> C on t r o l Vo l t ag e ma x
C on t r o l Vo l t ag e m i n
T emp e r a t u r e ma x
242 , 0 V
123456 78
L1 L2 L3
This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min.


Type in the lower limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the control
voltage becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V.

T r e s h o l d s - >
Cu r r e n t ma
( p x eak )
Op . V o l t ag
ma e x
> Op . V o l t ag
m i e n
T emp e r a t u r
ma e x
200 , 0 V
123456 78
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.4 Temperature max.


Type in the upper limit for the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value of
the temperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from -100° C to +100° C.

Page 49
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
T r e s h o l d s - >
Op . V o l t a
e ma g x
Op . V o l t a
e m i g n
> T emp e r a t u
e ma r x
T emp e r a t u
e m i r n
+50 , 0 C
123456 78
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.5 Temperature min.


Type in the lower limit of the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value of
the temperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from -100° C to +100° C.

T r e s h o l ds - >
Op . V o lt age m i n
T emp e r at u r e ma x
> T emp e r at u r e m i n
P r e s s u re ma x
- 50 . 0 C
123456 78
L1 L2 L3
This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.6 Pressure max.


Type in the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of the
temperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar.

T r e s h o l ds - >
T emp e r at u r e ma x
T emp e r at u r e m i n
> P r e s s u re ma x
P r e s s u re m i n
35 0ba r
123456 78
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.7 Pressure min.


Type in the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of the
temperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar.

Page 50
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
T r e s h o l ds - >
T emp e r at u r e ma x
T emp e r at u r e m i n
P r e s s u re ma x
> P r e s s u re m i n
18 0ba r
123456 78
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim


Type in the rated primary current of your current transducer.

The permissible range is from 0 A to 5000 A.

Ana l og D a t a
T r e s ho l d s - >
> CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p r im
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s e c
Ac t ua l C on t r . Vo l t age
50 0 A
1234567 8
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.

5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec


Type in the rated secondary current of your current transducer.

Permissible values are 1 A and 5 A.

Ana l og D a t a
T r e s ho l d s - >
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p r im
> CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s e c
Ac t ua l C on t r . Vo l t age
5 A
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

Note: The current transformer has to be connected to the correct terminal of the RPH2
(1 A or 5 A, see wiring diagram).

Page 51
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.3.4 Actual Control Voltage
Type in the measured value of the actual control voltage. This input calibrates the
internal voltage measurement. This value acts as base for the calculation of
compensation of the switching moment.

The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V.

Ana l o g Da t a
CT R a t ed Cu r r . p r im
CT R a t ed Cu r r . s e c
> Ac t u a l Con t r . Vo l t age
T emp e r at u r e - >
1 12 , 2 V
1234 5678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

Determine the correct value:


Measure the actual value of the control voltage on terminal -X6:10 and -X6:11 with an
calibrated voltmeter and type in this value.
Type in the determined value.

Note:This input calibrates the voltage measurement function. The correct input of this
value is absolutely necessary. You cannot calibrate the RPH2 with the PC-software
‘RPH-Tool’.
In the Normal-Mode (Ready-LED is steady-light) the measured voltage is displayed.
After calibrating the voltage measurement check the correct function by monitoring the
display.

5.3.5 Temperature
The following submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,
RPH2-xxA3.
In this submenu the temperature transducer is calibrated.

Ana l o g D a t a
CT R a t e d Cu r r . s e c
Ac t u a l C on t r . Vo l t age
> T emp e r a t u r e - >
P r e s s u r e - >

12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.3.5.1 Value at 4 mA
Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 4 mA. This
information is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer.

Page 52
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
T emp e r a t u r e - >
> V a l u e a t 4 mA
V a l u e a t 2 0 mA

- 40 , 0 C
12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.3.5.2 Value at 20 mA
Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 20 mA.
This information is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer.

T emp e r a t u r e - >
V a l u e a t 4 mA
> V a l u e a t 2 0 mA

+100 , 0 C
12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.3.6 Pressure
These submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.
In the following submenus the pressure transducer can be calibrated.

Ana l o g D a t a
CT R a t e d Cu r r . s e c
Ac t u a l C on t r . Vo l t age
T emp e r a t u r e - >
> P r e s s u r e - >

12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.3.6.1 Value at 4 mA
Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 4 mA. This
information is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer.

P r e s s u r e - >
> Va l ue a t 4 mA
Va l ue a t 2 0 mA

0ba r
12345678
L1 L2 L3

Page 53
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.3.6.2 Value at 20 mA
Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 20 mA. This
information is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer.

P r e s s u r e - >
Va l ue a t 4 mA
> Va l ue a t 2 0 mA

500ba r
12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.4 Alarms

5.4.1 Reset Obligatory


In this submenu you can select which alarm outputs (and the according LED on the front
panel of the RPH2) are to be acknowledged. Alarm-outputs which are marked as reset
obligatory are displayed on the front panel and activated (closed) until you press the
‘Quitt’-button, regardless whether the alarm is still active or already gone.
Example:

A l a rms
> R e s e t ob l i ga t o r y
L o c k - ou t
A l a rm L i s t - >

10100000
12345678
L1 L2 L3

In the example mentioned above the alarms 1 and 3 are marked with the function
"Reset obligatory" (must be acknowledged).

Reset Obligatory (Setting ”1”):


Alarm is active -> LED is blinking, alarm-output active
Alarm is acknowledged -> LED has steady-light, alarm-output active
Alarm off -> LED off, alarm-output not active
respectively:
Alarm is active -> LED is blinking, alarm-output active
Alarm off -> LED is blinking, alarm-output active
Alarm is acknowledged -> LED off, alarm-output not active

Alarm is not reset obligatory (Setting ”0”):


Alarm is active -> LED has steady-light, alarm-output active
Alarm off -> LED off, alarm-output not active

Page 54
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Note: With the function "reset obligatory" you can change an alarm-message from the
type pulse type to a steady alarm type (see 5.4.3).

5.4.2 Lock-Out
Here you can mark each of the 7 alarm outputs to produce a blocking of the device in case
of the corresponding alarm occurs.
That means:
No switching operation is possible, the green LED is dark and the contact "Device not ready"
(-X6:12/13) is closed.

Some actions or alarms cause a lock out in any case ,also without activating the responding
alarm (LED dark, contact -X6:12-13 is closed):
· Keyswitch is "OFF"
· Relay starting up
· Reference voltage is missing
· Frequency not in permitted range
· Neutral earthing switch in intermediate position

Example:

A l a rms
R e s e t ob l i ga t o r y
> L o c k - ou t
A l a rm L i s t - >

00100000
12345678
L1 L2 L3

In the example mentioned above the activating of alarm 3 blocks the RPH2. No
operation is possible, until the "Quit" button is pressed. The output contact "Device not
ready" (-X6:12/13) is closed.

5.4.3 Alarm List


The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH2. Each internal
alarm (message) can be assigned to up to 7 alarm-outputs. The assignment is made
through the setting of a ‘1’ at the corresponding display-unit.

Example:

A l a rm L is t - >
F r equ e nc y m i n
F r equ e nc y ma x
> C u r r e n t ma x ( p e a k )
*R e f . V o lt age F a i l u r e
0010 0 1 0 0
1234 5 6 7 8
L1 L2 L 3

Page 55
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
In the example mentioned above the alarm-message ‘Current max. (peak)’ is assigned
to alarm-output 3 and alarm-output 6.

The asterisk (‘*’) at the position ‘Ref. Voltage Failure’ in the picture above indicates that
the fault ‘Ref. Voltage Failure’ is pending, that means the reference voltage is missing.

Pulse-alarm:
If an alarm-message is a pulse, this alarm-message is active only for a period of 0,5
seconds. If this alarm-message is assigned to an alarm-output which is marked as ‘reset
obligatory’, the alarm-output remains active until this alarm is acknowledged.

Note: The assignment of an alarm-message to the alarm-output number 8 has no


effect.

5.4.3.1 Lock-out
This is only a summary alarm. It is generated by other alarms which cause a blocking of the
relay. It is active when the device is blocked (see 5.4.2). The alarm itself causes no blocking
of the device!

5.4.3.2 Frequency min


The reference voltage (phase L1) is monitored permanently. If the lower limit of the
frequency is reached, an alarm-message ‘Frequency min.’ is generated.

Limits:
Rated Frequency Lower Limit
50 Hz 45 Hz
60 Hz 54 Hz
16 2/3 Hz 15 Hz

Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only if the reference voltage is
connected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm ‘Frequency min.’ is
generated.

5.4.3.3 Frequency max.


The reference voltage is monitored permanently on phase L1. If the upper limit of the
frequency is reached, an alarm-message ‘Frequency max.’ is generated.

Limits:
Rated Frequency Upper Limit
50 Hz 55 Hz
60 Hz 66 Hz
16 2/3 Hz 18,26 Hz

Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only, if the reference voltage is
connected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm ‘Frequency min.’ is
generated.

Page 56
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak)
This alarm-message is generated if the setting of the current maximum (peak value) is
reached or exceeded during a switching operation in one or more phases (thresholds
see 5.3.1.1)

The peak-value of the current is monitored, not the RMS-value.

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure


This alarm-message is generated if the reference voltage is missing for more than
2 seconds.

Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm
is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2).

5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure


This alarm-message is generated if the minute-pulse is missing.

5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate


This alarm-message is generated if the position of the ‘Neutral-switch’ is not defined.

Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm
is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2).

5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded


This message indicates, that the ‘Neutral-switch’ is in position ‘grounded’. If the position
‘grounded’ is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set ‘Neutral grounded’.

Note: This message is not an alarm-message but may be helpful for supervising

5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated


This message indicates, that the ‘Neutral-switch’ is in position ‘isolated’. If the position
‘isolated’ is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set ‘Neutral isolated’ (see 5.4.3.8).

5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR


This alarm-message is generated when the automatic selftest discovers an internal error
(output circuit is not working correct).

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm
is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2).

5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR


This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 1.

Page 57
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

5.4.3.12 Selftest CH2 ERROR


This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 2.

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx.

5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min


This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 1 (the function of
channel 1 is depending on configuration of the RPH2 and the ‘Function Channel 1’ -
chapter 5.1.6) is to short, i. e. perhaps not all three phase are switched within this time.

The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms.

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

5.4.3.14 Command Time CH2 min


This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 2 (opening) is to
short.

The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms.

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx .

5.4.3.15 Operating Time min


This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than
2 ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is shorter).

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS.

5.4.3.16 Operating Time max.


This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than
2 ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is longer).

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS.

Page 58
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure
This alarm-message is generated when:
· The monitoring of the CB-position is undefined.
· The operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away for more than 5 ms
for opening and 10 ms for closing from the pre-set operating times (only with adaptive
control, see 4.2.5).

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS.

5.4.3.18 Archive Full

This alarm-message indicates that the archive is nearly full.

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

Note: The archive is capable to store 1000 switching operations. When the 900th
switching operation is stored in the archive the alarm-message is generated. Each
switching operation following generates an alarm-message until the archive is read by
the PC-Software RPH-Tool,

5.4.3.19 Archive Failure


This alarm-message is generated, when storing data into the archive fails.

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min


This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the control voltage is reached (see
chapter 5.3.1.3 ‘Control Voltage min.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,


RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.21 Control Voltage max.


This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the control voltage is reached (see
chapter 5.3.1.2 ‘Control Voltage max.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,


RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.22 Temperature min


This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the ambient temperature is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.5 ‘Temperature min.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or


RPH2-xxA3.

Page 59
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.4.3.23 Temperature max.
This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the ambient temperature is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.4 ‘Temperature max.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-


xxA3.

5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault


This alarm-message indicates an error of the temperature transducer (cable or sensor),
i. e. the temperature measurement is not working.

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-


xxA3.

5.4.3.25 Pressure min


This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.7 ‘Pressure min.).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.26 Pressure max.


This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.6 ‘Pressure max.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault


This alarm-message indicates an error of the pressure transducer (cable or sensor), i. e.
the pressure measurement is not working.

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.5 Measurement

5.5.1 Current Graphs


In this submenu you can display the current curves of the last 4 switching operations for
each phase (L1, L2, L3), as well as the maximum currents (peak value).

Me a s u r eme n t
> Cu r r e n t Gr aph s - >
Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
F r e q u en c y
Cu r r e n t ( RMS )
YES
12345678
L1 L2 L3

Page 60
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Pressing the ‘Enter’-button activates the Graph-mode. Repeatedly pressing the ‘Enter’-
button allows to go through the last 4 switching operations. Pressing the ‘+’- or ‘-’-button
changes from phase L1 to phase L2 to phase L3 to the peak values of the current of
each phase. When a graph is displayed, the amplification factor of the graph can be
changed. Pressing the [Quitt] and [+] button at the same time increases the
amplification, [Quitt] and [-] button decreases the amplification.

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

5.5.2 Measured Times


The measured times of the last switching operation are displayed in this submenu. The
values available are depending on the configuration of the RPH2.

Me a s u r eme n t
Cu r r e n t Gr aph s - >
> Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
F r e q u en c y
Cu r r e n t ( RMS )

12345678
L1 L2 L3

5.5.2.1 Command OUT


This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage
(phase L1) until the command is executed.

Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
> C o mm a n d OU T
CB S i g na l r e c e i v ed
Ca l c u l a t e d Op . T i me
Me a s u r e d Op . T i me
4 . 5 9 . 5 9 . 5ms
12345 6 78
L1 L2 L 3

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms.

5.5.2.2 CB Signal received


This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage
(phase L1) until the auxiliary-contacts of the CB are switched.

Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
C o mm a n d OU T
> CB S i g na l r e c e i v ed
Ca l c u l at e d Op . T i me
Me a s u r ed Op . T i me
123 . 3 1 24 . 1 12 3 . 7ms
12345 6 78
L1 L2 L 3

Page 61
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS.

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms.

5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time


This submenu shows the calculated operating time according to the measured service
conditions (temperature, pressure, control voltage). If the compensation facility is not
active, the set values of "Operating Time CH1" (see 5.2.1).and "Operating Time CH2"
(see 5.2.2) are displayed.

Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
C o mm a n d OU T
CB S i g na l r e c e i v ed
> Ca l c u l at e d Op . T i me
Me a s u r ed Op . T i me
128 . 7 1 29 . 0 12 9 . 0ms
12345 6 78
L1 L2 L 3

5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time


This submenu shows the measured operating times, assuming that the values for "Aux.
Timeshift CH1/CH2" (see 5.2.5, 5.2.6 and 4.1.2.1) have been determined correctly.

Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
C o mm a n d OU T
CB S i g na l r e c e i v ed
Ca l c u l at e d Op . T i me
> Me a s u r ed Op . T i me
128 . 9 1 29 . 3 12 8 . 9ms
12345 6 78
L1 L2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS.

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0.5 ms.

5.5.3 Frequency
This submenu shows the actual frequency of the reference voltage.

The resolution of the frequency measurement is 0,05 Hz.

Me a s u r eme n t
Cu r r e n t Gr aph s - >
Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
> F r e q u en c y
Cu r r e n t ( RMS )
50 , 00Hz
12345 678
L1 L2 L 3

Page 62
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
The switching moments (switching programs) are permanently corrected according to
the measured frequency.

Note: The measurement of the frequency works only when the reference voltage is
connected. If the reference voltage is missing the rated frequency is displayed instead.

5.5.4 Current (RMS)


This submenu shows the actual measured line current per phase.

Me a s u r eme n t
Me a s u r e d T i me s - >
F r e q u en c y
> Cu r r e n t ( RMS )
Co n t r o l Vo l t a ge
0 0 0 A
12345 678
L1 L2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.

5.5.5 Control Voltage


This submenu shows the actual measured control voltage.

Me a s u r eme n t
F r e q u en c y
C u r r e n t ( RMS )
> C o n t r o l Vo l t ag e
A c t u a l T emp e r a t u r e
61 , 2 V
123456 78
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.5.6 Actual Temperature


This submenu shows the actual measured ambient temperature.

Me a s u r e me n t
C u r r e n t ( RMS )
Co n t r o l Vo l t a g e
> A c t u a l T e mp e r a t u r e
T e mp e r a t u r e f . C o mp
61 , 2 V
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

Page 63
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation
This submenu shows the averaged environmental temperature (see chapter 4.2)

Me a s u r eme n t
C on t r o l Vo l t age
A c t u a l T emp e r a t u r e
> T emp e r a t u r e f . C omp
A dd i t i on . Op . T i me s - >
+0 , 0 C
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.5.8 Additional Operating Times


The following submenus show the calculated additional times according to the service
conditions and the configuration of the RPH2.

5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1


This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 1 for the actual control voltage
per phase.

Ad d i t i o n. Op . T i me s - >
> V o l t a g e CH 1
V o l t a g e CH 2
T emp e r at u r e CH 1
T emp e r at u r e CH 2
- 0 , 1 -0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.8.2 Voltage CH2


This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 2 for the actual control voltage
per phase.

Ad d i t i o n. Op . T i me s - >
V o l t a g e CH 1
> V o l t a g e CH 2
T emp e r at u r e CH 1
T emp e r at u r e CH 2
- 0 , 1 -0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

Page 64
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
5.5.8.3 Temperature CH1
This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperature
measured for channel 1 per phase.

Ad d i t i o n. Op . T i me s - >
V o l t a g e CH 1
V o l t a g e CH 2
> T emp e r at u r e CH 1
T emp e r at u r e CH 2
- 0 , 1 -0 , 1 - 0 , 1ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.8.4 Temperature CH2


This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperature
measured for channel 2 per phase.

Ad d i t i o n. Op . T i me s - >
V o l t a g e CH 2
T emp e r at u r e CH 1
> T emp e r at u r e CH 2
P r e s s u re CH 1
- 0 , 1 -0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.8.5 Pressure CH1


This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressure
measured for channel 1 per phase.

Ad d i t i o n. Op . T i me s - >
T emp e r at u r e CH 1
T emp e r at u r e CH 2
> P r e s s u re CH 1
P r e s s u re CH 2
- 0 , 1 -0 , 1 - 0 , 1ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.8.6 Pressure CH2


This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressure
measured for channel 2 per phase.

Page 65
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Ad d i t i o n. Op . T i me s - >
T emp e r at u r e CH 1
T emp e r at u r e CH 2
P r e s s u re CH 1
> P r e s s u re CH 2
- 0 , 1 -0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms
12345678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3)


This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure per phase (L1, L2, L3).

Me a s u r eme n t
T emp e r a t u r e f . C omp
A dd i t i on . Op . T i me s - >
> P r e s s u r e ( L 1 / L2 / L3 )
P r e s s u r e ( L 1 )
310 3 01 307 ba r
123 45678
L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.10 Pressure (L1)


This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure.

Me a s u r eme n t
T emp e r a t u r e f . C omp
A dd i t i o n . Op . T i me s - >
P r e s s u r e ( L1 / L2 / L3 )
> P r e s s u r e ( L1 )
3 10ba r
12345 678
L1 L2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA1.

5.6 Auxiliary functions

5.6.1 Alarm Input


This submenu is for testing only. It shows the inputs (auxiliary contacts and position of
the neutral earthing switch) of the alarm-board (only available for module RPH2-xxS).

Page 66
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
5.6.2 Alarm Output
This submenu is for testing only. You can set the alarm-outputs individually by typing a
‘1’ at the according position of the pattern shown on the display (only available for
module RPH2-xxS).

5.6.3 Error Type


If an internal fault is detected (selftest interval > 0 h), error flags are displayed in this
menu.

Error type 1: the switching command on input -x8:1 or -x8:6 is still bending
Error type 2-4: CH1 phase L1 is defective
Error type 5-7: CH1 phase L2 is defective
Error type 8-10 CH1 phase L3 is defective
Error type 11-13: CH2 phase L1 is defective
Error type 14-16: CH2 phase L2 is defective
Error type 17-19: CH2 phase L3 is defective

5.7 Switching archive


This submenu shows the result of the last 8 switching operations.

List of messages:
· Switching OK
· NOT Switched (no operation of the breaker)
· Command Time min (command impulse to short (<100 ms))

In the statusline the date and the time of the operation is displayed.

Ahead of the messages a reference to the archive entries is shown:


"n" last operation
"n-1" operation before
etc.

Page 67
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
6 COMMISSIONING

6.1 Commissioning preliminaries


Before initial operation of a RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller, time should be taken in
order to become familiar with operation of the device and, if a portable PC is available,
with the parameterization software also.

NOTE: After the RPH2 is connected to the supply voltage the first time, or after a self
test, it will last about 20 seconds until the green LED is illuminated and the relay is
ready for operation (see also 2.4.2.2). If the green LED stays dark, please check at
first the proper connection of the reference voltage and the neutral earthing switch

6.1.1 Settings

6.1.1.1 Factory Settings


Depending on the model, all values for CB-Data, compensation and all thresholds for
the alarms are set to ‘0’, except:

System Frequency: 50 Hz
Control Voltage: 125 V
Switching Program: Transformer
Function Cannel 1: CB closing
Selftest Interval: 24 h
CT Rated Current
primary: 1A
secondary: 1A

Alarms:
Ref. Voltage Failure -> Alarm1
Neutral intermediate -> Alarm2
All other alarm functions are inactive.

6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings


Before the RPH2 is ready to operate, all relevant settings must be completed. These
data must be set before the first operation (depending on the model):

· System frequency (5.1.2)


· Control voltage (5.1.3)
· Rated pressure (5.1.4)
· Switching program (5.1.5)
· Function channel 1 (5.1.6)
· Operating times of each pole (5.2.1, 5.2.2)
· Arcing Times (5.2.3, 5.2.4)
· All data for compensation and adaptive control (5.2.7....5.2.16)
· Actual control voltage (5.3.4)
· Ratings of external transducers (5.3.5, 5.3.6)

Page 68
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
All other parameters are not essential for operation.

To evaluate the necessary data, use the configuration checklist shown on the last
pages of this service manual.

6.1.2 Inspection
Check whether the external wiring corresponds to the relevant RPH2 wiring diagram.
Particularly whether the reference voltage and the neutral earthing switch position
signals are wired. If a switching of the neutral is not intended, then it is necessary to
short circuit the relevant input terminals of the RPH2 (-X6:8 with -X8:11 for neutral
isolated or -X6:8 with -X8:12 for neutral grounded).

Make sure that the case is properly earthed. If external sensors are necessary, they
are to be installed according to the manufacturer's information. Check whether the
plug-in unit is sitting firmly and the fixing screws are tightened.

Measure the actual RPH2 control voltage with a multimeter. This value (depending on
the model) is required for parameterization (5.3.4).
Check the 48 V field voltage between the terminals -X6:8 and-X6:11 (ground).
Measure the voltage at the inputs of the external transducers (approx. 24 VDC).

Compare the displayed values on the RPH2 for control voltage, hydraulic pressure and
ambient temperature (only models RPH2-xxA) with the externally measured ones.

Verify the connections of the voltage and current transformer circuits (current only for
model RPH2-xI) to the correct terminals (100/Ö3V or 220/Ö3V, 1A or 5A) of the RPH2.

The two functions of the menu [Aux. Functions] maybe helpful by testing the external
connections:

The proper connection of the CB’s auxiliary contacts to the RPH2 (only model
RPH2-Sxx) can easily be checked by the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Input]. When
the circuit breaker is in the closed position you must see three ‘1’ at the first positions
in the status line.

Au x . Fun c t i on s
> A l a rm I n pu t
A l a rm Ou t pu t
Se l f t e s t E RROR
RPH2 V 3 . 04 16 - 03 - 99
11100001
12345678
L1 L2 L3

When the breaker is in the open position, three ‘0’ will be displayed.
If the remote reset input is activated, at the fourth position a ‘1’ must be displayed.

Page 69
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
By using the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Output] you can activate individually each
alarm relay by typing a ‘1’ at the according position of the pattern. So the external
wiring of the alarm circuits can be checked on correct function.

6.1.3 First operation


When all inspections are done, operate the dead circuit breaker via the RPH2. On
Point-on-Wave-Controllers with option S check, if the measured operating times are
correct, otherwise adjust the values for [Aux.Timeshift] according to 4.1.2.1. Prove that
the command impulse to the RPH2 is of sufficient length.

For the first load switchings, we recommend using an oscillograph to measure the
currents of the three phases together with the reference voltage, in order to verify that
the unit is working correctly. It is helpful if the three relayed drive commands can also
be recorded on additional oscillograph traces.

By using a RPH2 with the option I the currents during switching can be displayed and
analysed (see 5.5.1).

If the results are not satisfactory you must adapt the pole operating times and/ or the
arcing times to achieve the optimal function.

Page 70
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Configuration Checklist RPH2

System Data

System Frequency O 16 2/3 Hz O 50 Hz O 60 Hz

Control Voltage (48V...250V) ........................V

Rated Pressure .........................bar

Switching program: O Transformer O Shunt Reactor O Capacitor Bank

O User Program

Point on Wave L1 L2 L3
T_C1 Neutral isolated ms
T_C1 Neutral grounded ms
T_C2 Neutral isolated ms
T_C2 Neutral grounded ms

Function Channel 1 O CB Close O CB Open (RPH2-1xx only)

Language O German O English O French


O Free language ...................................
Selftest Interval .............Hours

CB Data:
CB Data L1 L2 L3
Operating Time CH1 ms
Operating Time CH2 ms
Arcing Time CH1 ms
Arcing Time CH2 ms
Aux.Timeshift CH1 ms
Aux.Timeshift CH2 ms

Adaptive Control Weighting Factor ....................

Compensation O Yes O No

kU1 Voltage CH1 ....................

kP1 Pressure CH1 ....................

kU2 Voltage CH2 ....................

kP2 Pressure CH2 ....................

Page 71
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Configuration Checklist RPH2

Temperature Compensation:
Switching Channel 1 Switching Channel 2
Temperature Delta_t Temperature Delta_t
+50 °C ms +50 °C ms
+40 °C ms +40 °C ms
+30 °C ms +30 °C ms
+20 °C ms +20 °C ms
+10 °C ms +10 °C ms
0 °C ms 0 °C ms
-10 °C ms -10 °C ms
-20 °C ms -20 °C ms
-30 °C ms -30 °C ms
-40 °C ms -40 °C ms
-50 °C ms -50 °C ms

Analogue Data:
Thresholds:

Current max. (peak) .................... A

Control Voltage max ..................... V

Control Voltage min ..................... V

Temperature max .................... °C

Temperature min ..................... °C

Pressure min ..................... bar

Pressure max .................... bar

Actual Control Voltage .................... V (to be measured and set at site)

CT rated current prim. .................... A

CT rated current sec. O 1A O 5A

Temperature:
Value at 4 mA ..................... °C

Value at 20 mA ..................... °C

Pressure:
Value at 4 mA ...................... bar

Value at 20 mA ...................... bar

Page 72
Issue 3 58.020.034 E AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding
2004-02
Configuration Checklist RPH2

Alarms:

Alarmtext 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Alarm Functions
Reset Obligatory
Lock-out
Alarm List
Lock-out
Frequency min
Frequency max
Current max
Ref.Voltage Failure
RTC Impulse Failure
Neutral Intermediate
Neutral Grounded
Neutral Isolated
Selftest ERROR
Selftest CH1 ERROR
Selftest CH2 ERROR
Command Time CH1 min
Command Time CH2 min
Operating Time min
Operating Time max
Drive Mech.Failure
Archive Full
Archive Failure
Control Voltage min
Control Voltage max
Temperature min
Temperature max
Temp. Transducer Fault
Pressure min
Pressure max
Press. Transducer Fault

Page 73
AREVA T&D Austria AG, Leonding Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Presentation

Reminder Frames may be supplied by either AREVA or the customer.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Components necessary for the operation 2
Support--frame components (per pole) 3
Preparing the column 5
Frame--support assembly 6

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 1/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Components necessary for the operation

Necessary product Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary for the installing :


Mark Diagram Designation Number

Lifting strap
(1) 2
(3 m)

Handling The support--frame assembly operations and lifting


the pole should be performed by at least two per-
sons.

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 2/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Support-- frame components (per pole)

Introduction If the support--frame is supplied by AREVA, check the necessary compo-


nents to the assembling.

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling :


components
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(2) Support 2

(3) Support 2

Screws
(5) 1
H M16-45

Screws
(7) 16
H M16-35

Washer
(9) 16
NORDLOCK NL16 SS

Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 3/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Support-- frame components (per pole), continued

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling :


components,
continued

Mark Diagram Designation Number

Screws
(20) 16
H M16-45

(21) Strengthening piece 2

(24) Strengthening piece 4

(25) Strengthening piece 2

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 4/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Preparing the column

Dismantling the case Remove the side panels of the case.


of the poles NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B and
C.

Preparing the pole D Sling the “A” column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1).
D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood cover
laying :
-- first, the end of the column,
-- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensure
the correct installing of the frame supports.

X minimum = 260 mm

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 5/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :
Step Action
1 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).
-- Install the screw (5) only on this support.

10

x1 3
5
2x2
9 H M16--45
7

H M16--35

2 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).

2
10

2x2
9
7

H M16--35

Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 6/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly, continued

Process, continued The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :
Step Action
3 Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support
(2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the
supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the
frame--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20).

x4
20
3
25
21 H M16--45

4 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).
10

2x2
9
7

2
H M16--35
5 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).
10

2x2
9
7

H M16--35

Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 7/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly, continued

Process, continued The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :
Step Action
6 Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support
(2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the
supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the
frame--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20).

21
3

2x2
20
25

21
H M16--45

2 25

7 Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support with


the use of the screws (20).

x2
20
24

24
H M16--45

x2
20
24

24
H M16--45

Continued on next page.

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 8/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

Frame-- support assembly, continued

Process, continued The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :

Step Action
8 Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques.

18 daN.m

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 9/10
Installation
Support-- frame assembly

This page is intentionally blank.

10--2006 L31--138EN/02
E AREVA 10/10
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

Presentation

Necessary tools List of the necessary AREVA tools for the lifting and positionning of the pole :

Mark Diagram Designation Number

LIFTING STRAP
(1) 2
”SPANSET” (3 m -- 1000 kg)

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Lifting the pole 2
Positioning the pole 3

06--2004 L31--200EN/04
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

Lifting the pole

Process Install the two flexible lifting straps (1), placing these at the end of the column.
By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on the
base of the frame.
Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legs of the chassis frame (9) to ensure
guidance of the pole at the time of lifting.
Lift the pole with precaution.

10

06--2004 L31--200EN/04
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

Positioning the pole

Process The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole :

Step Action
1 Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its ground
attachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting the
orientation of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.

2 If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so that the
upper plate is level.
3 Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground using nut.
4 Remove the lifting straps.
5 Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.
18 daN.m

6 Tighten the fixings on the two floor seatings in accordance with the
module entitled ’Tightening Torques’ and in accordance with the
diameters of the anchoring points.

12

06--2004 L31--200EN/04
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2004 L31--200EN/04
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Presentation

Diagram

01/1-- 1
01/2-- 1
01/3-- 1

01/1-- 2
01/2-- 2
01/3-- 2

01/1-- 2

01/1-- 1
01/2-- 2

01/2-- 1 01/3-- 2

01/3-- 1

XXX XXX 0010


no SÉRIE
Rep. 01/3-- 1

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Components, products and accessories 2
Preparing the contact surfaces 3
Installing terminal 4

08--2004 L31--505EN/01
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Components, products and accessories

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Terminal 1

Screws
(3) 4
H M12--45

Necessary products List of the AREVA products and accessories necessary for the installing :
and accessories

AREVA
Diagram Designation
reference

--01861262 Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835106 Vaseline 204--9

--01835118 Contactal grease

--01831320 Abrasive paper A400

--02212337 Scotch Brite A--VF

--02212334 Rag

--02211842 Round brush No.4

--02211831 Brush No.16

08--2004 L31--505EN/01
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Preparing the contact surfaces

Preparing the The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease.
contact grease CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease

Preparing the The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :
contact surfaces

Step Action Diagram

X1
X2
Remove the temporary screws
1 from the terminal pads X1 or 01/1-- 1
X2. 01/2-- 1
01/1-- 2
01/2-- 2 01/3-- 1
01/3-- 2

2 Dry rub with fine emery cloth.

3 Eliminate the dust produced.

4 Coat with CONTACT


GREASE.

5 Wipe with a clean rag, leaving


just a thin layer of grease.

6 Rub over the grease with wa-


terproof abrasive paper A400.

08--2004 L31--505EN/01
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces

Installing terminal

Process Assemble immediately the terminal (1) on one interrupting chamber (2) after
preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminal using screws (3); use
CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.

01/1-- 1
2 01/2-- 1
2 01/3-- 1

01/1-- 2 2
01/2-- 2
1
01/3-- 2

x 4
3
H M12--45
5 daN.m

Comment D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be :


R £ 2mW
D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in the
same way.

08--2004 L31--505EN/01
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Presentation

Diagram

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary :


Mark Diagram Designation Number

Lifting strap
(12) 2
(3 m)

In this module This module contains the following topics :


Topic Page
Components and products 2
Preparing the capacitors 3
Installing the capacitors 4

12--2004 L31--600EN/03
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Components and products

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Capacitor 2

(3) Support 2

Support
(4) 2
or (depending on the apparatus)

Screws
(5) 8
H M12-30

Screws
(8) 4
H M12-45

Screws
(9) 4
H M12-25

(1) Spacer 4

Necessary products S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

12--2004 L31--600EN/03
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Preparing the capacitors

Installing S Install the support (3) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).
the supports
S Install the support (4) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

x 2
5
4

4
x 2 H M12--30
5 5 daN.m

3 H M12--30
5 daN.m

12--2004 L31--600EN/03
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Installing the capacitors

Installing the capacitors

Process Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) -- on the
opposite side as the bosse of the housing (13) -- using the screws (8)
and (9).

NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitor
support (4) side.

To avoid the rotation of the interrupting chambers, insert a wedge (13)


under the supports of the capacitors (3)--(4) after installing.

9
x 2
3 -- 4

H M12--25
5 daN.m
13 7
13

1
6

9
x 2 4
10

H M12--25
5 daN.m
4

10

x 2
8

H M12--45
5 daN.m

12--2004 L31--600EN/03
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Presentation

Diagram

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page
Preparing the stress--shields 2
Installing the stress--shields 3

12--2004 L31--650EN/04
E AREVA 1/4
Installation
Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Preparing the stress-- shields

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
com
nents

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Stress--shields ring 2

(2) Bracket 8

Screws
(3) 8
H M10-30

Necessary product MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

Assembling Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do not
tighten.

x 4
H M10--30

12--2004 L31--650EN/04
E AREVA 2/4
Installation
Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Installing stress-- shields

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

Screws
(5) 8
H M12-30

Necessary product LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)

Process Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4)
using the screws (5).

NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with “LOCTITE 262”.

1
4

x 4
5

1 H M10--30
3,2 daN.m

x 4
5

H M12--30
5 daN.m

12--2004 L31--650EN/04
E AREVA 3/4
Installation
Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

12--2004 L31--650EN/04
E AREVA 4/4
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Presentation

Identification Before the chambers -- column coupling, check that interrupting chambers
and column reference numbers are the right ones.

Coupling duration The final chambers -- column coupling operations must be realized in dura-
tion no longer than 40 min.
NOTE : The coupling operations should be performed by at least two
persons.

T(max) ≤ 40 min

Lifting equipment Provide for appropriate lifting equip-


ment :
(3,000 daN) (minimum). H+2m

A cradle elevator is obligatory. H

Coupling steps The chambers -- column coupling must be done in several steps :
Step Topic Page
A Preparing the column stress--shields 2
B Preparing the necessary components for the coupling 3
C Lifting and preparing the interrupting chambers 5

D Final coupling 6

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 1/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Preparing the column stress-- shields

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(33) Stress--shields ring 1

(32) Bracket 4

Screws
(34) 4
H M10-30

Assembling Install the brackets (32) on the stress--shields ring (33) using screws (34)
do not tighten.
32

33
x 4
34 H M10--30

Positioning Install temporarily the stress--shields ring (33) around the first insulator
base (1).

33

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 2/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Preparing the necessary components for the coupling

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA components necessary for the coupling :
components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(12) Seal 1

Screw
(14) H M16--60 (19 mm) 8
H M16--70 (30 mm)

Washer
(15) 16
M16

(16) Nut 8

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 3/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Preparing the necessary components for the coupling, continued

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA tools necessary for the coupling :
tools

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(7) Stop 1

(8) Lever 1

(17) “Short” Centering spindle


1
(18) “Long” Centering spindle

(19) Protection tool 1

(20) Tool for installing the coupling pin 1

(25) Screwing tool 1

Necessary products S MOLYKOTE M111 grease : greasing contact surface.


S LOCTITE 225 : screw sealing.
S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 4/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Lifting and preparing the interrupting chambers

Lifting the interrupt- Using the two straps provided, lift the chambers and MAKE THESE LEVEL
ing chambers with the housing (2) still at man--height (approximate weight : 700 kg).

Assembling the Assemble sections A, B and C of the spindles (17) and (18), without over--
centering spindles tightening, so that these can be removed later without difficulty.
NOTE : Spindle (18) is longer than spindle (17).

17
C
18
B
A

Deflating the S Remove the plug (5) from the transport cover (4) and press valve (6) to
chambers bring the volume of chambers back to ambient pressure.
REMINDER : transport gas pressure : nitrogen (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 20°C
(101.3 kPa).
S Install the plug (5).

6 5

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 5/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling

Orientation of For future identification of interrupting chambers, the right orientation must be
chambers respected during coupling.
The housing (2) possesses two bosses, (B1) and (B2).
Present the chambers directly above the column (1) in such a way that bosses
(B1) and (B2) of the housing (2) are situated on the same side as the support
(3) of the operating mechanism.

B1

1
B2

2
3

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 6/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Removing the The table below gives the steps of removing the transport cover of the
transport cover of the interrupting chambers :
interrupting
chambers

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the screws (13) and
introduce the lever (8) into the x 8
braces (9). Draw on the lever (8) 4
to open the cover (4). 13

H M16--55

9
8

2 Start of the timing.


(The final chambers -- column
coupling operations must be
realized in duration no longer
than 40 min).
3 Draw the cover (4) in order to
give off the cylinder (10).
Using the screwing tool (25), to
unscrew the cylinder (10) in
order to release the axis (11).

11

10

4 25

4 Introduce the stop (7) and install


the tool for removing the cou-
pling pin (20).
Remove the pin (11) and the
transport cover (4)

7
20
11

Continued on next page.


04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 7/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Installing the Install the centering spindles (17) and (18) so that these come to rest against
centering spindles the sphere of housing (2), tighten the nuts (30) a little.
Install the screws (39) on the centering spindles (17) and (18).

2
30
30

39

17
39 18

Removing the cover The table below gives the steps of removing the cover of the column :
of the column

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the screws (23) and
open the cover (22).
22

x 8
23

H M16--55

2 Turn the cover (22) of 90° in


order to deposit it.

22

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 8/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Installing the seal The table below gives the steps of installing the seal :

Step Action Diagram


1 Clean contact surfaces ”A” and
“B” using ISOPROPANOL.
Lubricate only the surface ”B” A
with MOLYKOTE M111
grease.

2 Install a new seal (12), referring


to “Preparing and installing
static seals”.
12
See the module “Erection
general procedures”.

3 Place the protection tool (19).

19

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 9/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Mounting The table below gives the steps of mounting the chambers -- column cou-
coupling pin pling pin :
Step Action Diagram
1 Move down slowly the inter-
rupting chambers (2) introduc-
ing the centring spindles (17)
and (18) into the holes of the 10
column flange (1). 2

18

26
2 Move down slowly the inter-
1 17
rupting chambers (2) to align
the hole of the cylinder (10)
with the hole of the tie--rod (26).

3 Insert the coupling pin (11)


20
installed on the tool (20).

20
4 Remove the tool (20).

11

5 Remove the protection tool 7


(19) and the stop (7).
Using the screwing tool (25),
screw the cylinder (10) until 25
stop.

10

19

Continued on next page.


04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 10/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Chambers/column The table below gives the steps of chambers/column coupling :


connection

Step Action Diagram


1 Clean contact surfaces ”A” and
“B” using ISOPROPANOL.
Lubricate only the surface ”B”
with MOLYKOTE M111 grease. B

2 Move the screws (28) of the


centring spindles.

28

28

3 Continue slowly lowering the


interrupting chambers until the
first sections of the centring 17
spindles (17) and (18), which are 18
no longer useful, can be re-
moved in the following order : (B)
-- first section (C)
-- screws (28)
-- second section (B)
(28)
NOTE : The purpose of this
operation is to avoid damag-
(C)
ing the ceramic fin of the col-
umn.

Continued on next page.

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 11/12
Installation
Column -- chambers coupling

Final coupling, continued

Chambers/column The table below gives the steps of chambers/column coupling :


connection

Step Action Diagram


4 Move down the housing (2) of
the chambers on the column. 2
Place the stress--shields ring
(33) on the extremity of the col- 34
umn and attach the whole using
screws (14), washers (15) and
special nut (16) referring to
“Screw sealing”.

See the module “Erection gen-


16
x6
eral procedures”. x 4 15

Tighten the nuts (16) to the rec- H M10--30 33


ommended torques, holding the 3,2 daN.m
head of the screws (14).
14

5 Tighten the screws (34) to the H M16--60


M16 60 (70)
recommended torques. 13,5 daN.m

6 End of coupling, stop the timing


and note the time passed.

7 Remove the last section (A) and 30


nut (30) of the centring spindles.
Install the last screws (14),
washers (15) and special nut
(16) referring to “Screw seal-
ing”.

See the module “Erection gen-


eral procedures”.

Tighten the nuts (16) to the rec- (A)


ommended torques, holding the
head of the screws (14). 16
15
x2
15
14
H M16--60 (70)
13,5 daN.m

04--2005 L31--716EN/01
E AREVA 12/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Presentation

Necessary product Grease MOBILPLEX 47 or MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing)

Necessary AREVA List of the AREVA tools necessary for the installing :
tools
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(1) Lifting strap 1

(6) Lever 1

Lifting equipment Provide an appropriate lifting equipment (300 daN).

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device on the
pole--support :

Step Topic Page


A Preparing the operating device 2
B Preparing the pole operating shaft 3
C Coupling the operating device 5
D Fastening the operating device 7
E 9
Removing the blocking tool

F Low voltage electrical wiring 10


G Permanent heating system 11

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 1/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Preparing the operating device

Unpacking Remove packaging protection and check that operating device and pole
reference numbers are the right ones.

Optical signalizations Check the position of operating device optical signalization :

Closing spring
Circuit--breaker Released
Open

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the operation :


components
Mark Diagram Designation Number

(11) Seal 1

(22) Spacer 4

Installing the -- Install the spacers (22) on the screws (9) outside the operating device.
necessary
components -- Install the seal (11) on the operating shaft (13).
-- Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the operating shaft
(13).

13

11

22
x4
9

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 2/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft

Introduction The pole is equipped -- for transport purposes -- with a blocking tool (4) and
a safety sheet metal (5) fixed temporarily at the end of the sleeve (12).
To realize the installing of the operating mechanism, it is necessary to :
a -- remove the blocking tool (4) and the safety sheet metal (5)
b -- proceed to manual opening the pole
c -- install the blocking tool (4) (”open” position)

4
12

Grease Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the pole operating shaft.

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 3/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft, continued

“Manual opening” The table below gives the steps of “manual opening” operation :
operation

Step Action Diagram


1 Remove the blocking tool
(4) and the safety sheet
metal (5) then screw the 5
lever (6) on the flange of the
sleeve (12).

12

2 With the help of the lever (6), 6


effect a 60° rotation of the
12
sleeve (12).

3 Put back the blocking tool


(4) on the flange of the M10
sleeve (12).
NOTE : This tool ensure
the angular positioning of 4
pole operating shaft
during the coupling with
the operating mechanism.
6

4 Remove the lever (6).

12 4

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 4/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Coupling the operating device

Necessary List of the AREVA components necessary for the operation :


components

Mark Diagram Designation Number

Washer
(10) 4
M20

(22) Spacer 1

(26) Spacer 1

(23) Eccentric spacer 2

Nut
(14) 4
H M20

(24) Wedge (thickness 1 mm) 1

(25) Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm) 2

Continued on next page.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 5/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Coupling the operating device, continued

Coupling The table below gives the steps of the operating device coupling :

Step Action
1 Sling the operating device using a lifting strap (1) like diagram.
NOTE : Do not remove the roof (17) of the operating device
before slinging.
2 Lift the operating device and make this level.
Approximate weight 300 kg.
3 Approach the operating device in assembly position, the jib of the
lifting equipment must be under the stress--shields ring (to avoid that
the cables touch the stress--shields ring).

The final approach must be done with extreme caution.

4 Introduce the operating mechanism shaft (13) into the cylinder (12)
of the pole operating shaft (7).
5 As soon as the lower fastening screw (9) “A” emerge from the hole
of the operating mechanism support (8), install the spacer (26),
washer (10) and the nut (14).
NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14).

26
14

9
10
8

12
1
17

”A”
13

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 6/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Fastening the operating device

Installing The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device fastening
the fastening nuts nuts :

Step Action
1 Install the spacer (22), washer (10) and the nut (14) on the lower
fastening screw “B”.
NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14).
2 Install the eccentric spacers (23), washers (10) and the nuts (14) on
the upper fastening screws “C” and “D”.
NOTE : Do not tighten the nuts (14).
3 Rotate the eccentric spacers (23) to do the contact with the lower
edge of the pole--support oblong holes.
4 Tighten -- temporarily at the indicated tightening torque -- the
fastening screws (9).

23

10 5 daN.m

14
23

x 2
”C”
”D” 9

”B”

14

10
22
x1

Continued on next page.


03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 7/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Fastening the operating device, continued

Wedging The table below gives the wedging procedure for the fastening screws
and tightening depending to the X play :

X
24
22 25

Important
20
35 daN.m
If the X play is ... Action
Tighten to the indicated tightening
X <1 mm
torque.
D Wedge between the spacer (22)
and the operating device (20) with the
X ≥1 mm provided wedges (24)--(25).
D Tighten the screw to the
indicated tightening torque.

Lifting strap Remove the lifting strap.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 8/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Removing the blocking tool

Process REMOVE THE BLOCKING TOOL (4).

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 9/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Low voltage electrical wiring

Process Connect up the operating device’s wires refer to the wiring diagram of the
circuit--breaker.
Connect up the operating device’s wires.
NOTE : Use the holes provided on the supports of the frame to fix
the cables.

Connecting up the Connect the wires from the electrical contact SF6 densimeter (18) cable (19)
contact densimeter to the operating mechanism terminal block, in accordance with the relative
cable diagram.

18

19

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 10/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

Permanent heating system

Process Switch on the permanent heating system of the operating device (in both
summer and winter) to avoid condensation, and the corrosion which might
result from this.

DO NOT SUPPLY THE OPERATING MECHANISM MOTOR WITH


CURRENT TO AVOID THE CLOSING SPRING BEING RELOADED.
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6
PRESSURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE
INSULATION pme.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 11/12
Installation
Installing the operating device

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2008 L31--7801EN/01
E AREVA 12/12
This page is intentionally blank.
T&D
HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCTS -- 130, rue Léon Blum 69611-- Villeurbanne Cedex -- France

Tél : +33 (0)4 72 68 34 34 -- Fax : +33 (0)4 72 68 39 22

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi